JP2023153267A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game when executing a performance that uses vibration.SOLUTION: A game machine is set such that a specific interlocking performance is executable following a specific performance, such as movable body operation, image display, and music piece reproduction, in a ready-to-win performance of an SP ready-to-win A. In the specific interlocking performance, a particular vibration performance by one of vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 is executable. A vibration mode differs between a particular vibration performance by one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and a vibration performance by a vibration pattern in an operation part performance. Jackpot reliability in execution of the operation part performance is one of 50% or higher, 70% or higher, and 100% according to an operation part performance pattern. For a ready-to-win performance of an SP ready-to-win A, for example jackpot reliability is about 40%.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-2

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, a technique has been proposed in which a vibrating means is provided in a ball firing handle (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-38019

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in improving the interest of the performance using vibrations.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the game's interest when performing effects using vibrations.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as the vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates;
a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect;
A reach effect execution means capable of executing a reach effect indicating that the control is in the advantageous state;
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance after the reach performance is started,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
The vibration performance execution means includes:
The predetermined vibration effect is performed at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display at which the reach effect is executed, and a second timing before the start of the variable display at which the reach effect is executed. is executable,
The special vibration performance can be performed during a specific performance period that is an execution period of the specific performance,
As the special vibration performance, it is possible to execute a first special vibration performance that corresponds to the operation of a movable body for performance different from the operation means during the specific performance period,
As the special vibration performance, a second special vibration performance corresponding to image display can be executed during the specific performance period,
The vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the first special vibration performance or the second special vibration performance,
The first special vibration performance and the second special vibration performance have different vibration modes,
The light emitting effect execution means is
The light emitting effect can be performed in different light emission modes when the predetermined vibration effect is being executed and when the first special vibration effect or the second special vibration effect is being executed,
The light emission effect can be performed in different light emission modes when the first special vibration effect is being executed and when the second special vibration effect is being executed,
The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing both the first special vibration effect and the second special vibration effect in one variable display.
It is characterized by
(1) Other gaming machines are gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to advantageous states (for example, jackpot gaming state) that are advantageous to the player, and display means (for example, image display device 5, etc.). ), and a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance process during variable display) capable of executing a plurality of types of performances including performances displayed on the display means, and the performance execution means includes: Multiple types of preview performances (e.g., pseudo-continuation fluctuation, notice after reach is established, reach development performance, battle command performance, win/fail branch performance, operation section performance, etc.) and display of character images that suggest any of the preview performances (for example, character 57AKA, 57AKB) in response to the execution of the preview effect (for example, an action in the suggestion target display) (for example, a display effect using effect display examples 57AK116, 57AK216, etc.) Then, during the period until the suggested action performance is executed, after the character image is displayed in a predetermined action (for example, an action in the movement state display), a special action different from the suggested action (for example, in the continuous suggestion display) is performed. (e.g., a display effect using effect display examples 57AK115, 57AK215, etc.), and after the special movement effect is executed, the display of the character image is made to perform the predetermined movement. , the suggested action performance can be executed (for example, execution of the display performance in performance execution examples 57AKG08 to 57AKG11 and 57AKH08 to 57AKH11), and the performance is higher than when the special action performance is not executed and the suggested action performance is executed. , when the suggested action performance is executed after the special action performance is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, in decision example 57 AKE24, the variable display result is high when it is a jackpot) rate of execution of suggestive performances, etc.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the suggestions of the preview performance to attract attention and improve the interest in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a presentation device regarding characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting when performing an operation part production pattern and a specific interlocking production. It is a figure showing the setting contents of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of an effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a performance control pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a timing at which an operation section effect can be executed. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a diagram showing an example of execution of an effect that causes a game effect lamp to emit light. It is a diagram showing an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of music reproduction execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the command at the time of starting opening prize winning. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a fluctuation pattern. It is a diagram showing the execution timing and execution period of a preview performance and the like. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the performance combination pattern during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a character display area. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance display regarding a performance image. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance display regarding a performance image. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance display regarding a performance image. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance display regarding a performance image. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of advance determination of a preview suggestion display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a determination of the advance notice after a reach is established. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of advance notice suggestion setting processing. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of determination by advance notice suggestion setting processing. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) that is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the first prize winning hole and the second prize winning hole (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is determined by the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the first and second prize openings (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. It is a percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc., are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 to perform a performance (a process for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The performance random number may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be in an open state in the small winning game state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the second special figure. A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as a "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probability variable state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is the set value, as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the setting value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the setting value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation of features related to setting suggestion effects)
During execution of the variable display, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate. For example, the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the production control process process includes a stop symbol determination process. The stop symbol determination process may be any process that can determine the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of decorative symbols. In the stop symbol determination process, when the super reach effect is executed, it may be determined that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate based on which of the ready-to-reach symbols has been determined. The reach symbols are the same decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R among the final stop symbols when the reach is lost and the final stop symbols when the jackpot is won.

In the stop symbol determination process, it is sufficient if the ready-to-reach symbols can be determined by referring to the ready-to-reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-reach symbols. . The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win symbol may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may vary depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot." For example, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest, and the number 6, the number 5, As the number 4, number 3, and number 2 change, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "jackpot" and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state decreases, corresponding to the number 1. Even if the determination ratio of decorative symbols that become reach symbols is set so that the variable display result when a decorative symbol that is a reach symbol is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol is a "jackpot" and the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state is the lowest. good. In addition, in the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "lose" or "jackpot". The number of judgment values assigned may be different for each decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern, or the number of judgment values allocated may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of decorative symbols that become reach symbols may differ.

In the stop symbol determination process, when the determined ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, it may be determined whether or not there is a setting suggestion performance. Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. All you have to do is make it so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance is determined to be either "no performance", which does not execute the setting suggestion performance, or "with performance", which executes the setting suggestion performance. At this time, if it is determined that "with effect", the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and stores the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. The setting value may be specified using the stored data in such a predetermined area.

When performing a setting suggestion effect, a setting suggestion pattern is determined. The setting suggestion pattern is selected from among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random values for setting suggestion pattern determination. It would be better if it were decided accordingly. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. For example, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 may be provided as the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns may have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not to change the symbol display color and the display color when changing. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggested display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is the normal display color. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, indicating that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, indicating that 6 is the highest set value. In this manner, in the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-reach symbols, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on whether the symbol display color has changed or not, and the symbol display color after the change.

When a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed, since the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. Furthermore, when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. In this way, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach mode includes a symbol display mode that gives a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a 7. It includes a pattern display mode that provides suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as decorative patterns corresponding to numbers, and also provides suggestions regarding the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. If the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the symbol display color is changed after the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state will be continuously made, and suggestions regarding the setting values will be made.

The setting suggestion performance can be executed in different manners depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, so the symbol display color is not changed to copper color. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is changed as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed to copper color. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, so the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is gold as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed.

The setting suggestion effect is instead of changing the display color of a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, or in addition to changing the display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of background images, outer frame images, and other arbitrary performance images, the output of audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable performance members, and the like, It may be possible to change the presentation mode by any presentation device, such as a combination of some or all of them. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed using arbitrary data related to effect control, arbitrary data not related to effect control, or data that is a combination of these, predetermined for execution of the effect. It only needs to be executable when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also referred to as a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when controlled to a jackpot gaming state and patterns that can be determined even when not controlled to a jackpot gaming state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even if the variable display result is a "loss", whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 can be determined with a variable display result. It may be possible to make a determination at a predetermined rate only when the result is a "jackpot", and to make it impossible to determine when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, pattern RE-2 is determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different rates depending on the set value.

In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process process, control is performed to execute a change performance when it is a change performance period. The change performance period may be predetermined as an execution period of a performance that changes the symbol display color when a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed. The change performance period may be set to different lengths of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period, which is longer than the first period, and pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest period, the fourth period. Generally, when a performance that informs an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player takes an image or video of that performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player, and posts it on SNS (Social Media). They tend to post on membership-based websites such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, a problem arises in that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, effects that are often performed even in unfavorable situations (unfavorable effects) do not stimulate the desire to take pictures, so if the unfavorable effects are carried out for a long time, they may end up making players feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. Thereby, when a performance advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the performance, and it is also possible to secure the shooting time. Furthermore, by securing the shooting time, the captured images and videos can be made public by the players on the Internet, and the public's interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, the photos taken at which pachinko machine 1 in which gaming parlor are made public, which from the perspective of the gaming parlor indicates that the player is advertising the gaming parlor. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the players but also to the game parlor side.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect includes arbitrary effects such as a pseudo continuous effect and a look-ahead preview effect to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation, as well as setting values of the pachinko machine 1. It may also be possible to make suggestions regarding. During execution of the variable display, a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. When executing any performance, there are two cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made after making suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, and cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made and the pachinko player It may also include a case where suggestions regarding setting values of the gaming machine 1 are made. When executing an arbitrary production, there are two cases in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then the suggestion ends, and another case in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is concerned. It may also include a case where a suggestion is made.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by giving a suggestion based on the effect mode of the pattern that is determined at a high rate. It is possible to diversify and improve gaming interest.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be made, but suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot", the pachinko game machine A suggestion regarding the setting value of 1 may be made. There may be cases where a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made without making any suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions are made regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. It may be something. For example, it may provide a suggestion regarding a variable probability state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows an example of the configuration of the effect device regarding the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance serving as a movable performance device is provided at the front of the lower end, which is the lower edge on the front side that overlaps with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to an operating motor via a link mechanism, for example. The movable body 32 can be changed between an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operating motor. The movable body 32 may be able to change its position by, for example, power from an operating solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is constructed using a decorative member, and has a structure that can be covered so that the display screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the player. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed using transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a transparent configuration so that the player can visually check the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs forming the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs forming the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs forming the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built into the operation rod (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or entirely formed of a translucent member. Thereby, by lighting the lever lamp 9B1, it is possible to cause the operating lever of the stick controller 31A to emit light. Further, by lighting the button lamp 9B2, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light.

For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or near the push button 31B, built into the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, or provided at the base of the operating lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to execute an operation part performance including a light emission performance accompanied by a vibration performance as a suggestive performance that suggests that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emitting effect included in the operation section effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned on to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with the vibration effect. In addition, in the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, one of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect. Good too. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be caused to emit light along with the vibration effect.

FIG. 10-2(A) shows a setting example of an operation section performance pattern used to execute the operation section performance. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation section performance patterns, operation section performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. Light emitting color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and usage are set corresponding to each operation part performance pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in the light emission performance included in the operation section performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation section performance pattern shows the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled when the operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern is executed. The application corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the timing at which the operation section performance is executed for each operation section performance pattern.

The operation section performance can be executed at a plurality of timings as the variable display progresses, for example, at the start of preliminary variation, at the start of target variation, at the time of establishing a reach, at the time of development of a reach, and at the time of triggering a win/fail notification. The pre-variation start time is a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation section performance. The start of the target variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of suggestion by the operation section performance. When the reach is achieved, the timing corresponds to the case where the variable display becomes the reach mode. When the reach is developed, the timing corresponds to the case where the development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of the super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies that a super reach performance will be executed after a normal reach performance is executed (development of reach). The win/fail notification inciting time corresponds to the inciting performance before the win/fail notification performance that notifies whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" while executing the super reach reach effect.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 10-2(A), a plurality of operation section effect patterns that can be used to execute operation section effects according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation section performance patterns can be used depending on a plurality of timings at which the operation section performance can be executed.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach effect of normal reach is executed and the reach effect of super reach is not executed. It is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether or not the reach performance of super reach is executed and the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is derived. For the super reach effect, for example, a plurality of reach effects including SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances that have different performance modes from each other. Each reach performance may include a performance with a common performance mode. In order to have jackpot reliability according to each reach effect, the determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" must be set. Bye. Depending on the fluctuation pattern determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of a super reach effect, the presentation mode of the reach effect, etc. It would be nice if it were configurable.

The operation section performance is executed at a predetermined rate depending on whether or not the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", regardless of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game, including variable displays, such as reach performances, for example. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of Such an operation part performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance is also referred to as a single operation part performance. On the other hand, in some cases, a performance is performed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with a specific performance. A performance using light emission or vibration that accompanies such a specific performance is also referred to as a specific interlocking performance.

FIG. 10-2(B) shows an example of settings when executing a specific linked effect. In this setting example, when executing a specific interlocking effect in conjunction with multiple specific effects, such as moving body movement, image display, music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, etc. Emission color and vibration pattern are set. The light emitting color in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is only necessary that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is the same as the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibrations of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking performance are included in the special vibration performance that can be executed along with the execution of the specific performance. The light emission of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emission effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach performance of SP reach A only needs to have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the second jackpot type has the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). Incidentally, the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery performance regarding the jackpot type according to the presence or absence of time saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the termination conditions, or may be a drawing performance regarding the jackpot type that was announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may be a lottery effect regarding whether or not there is a rank increase and the amount of increase resulting in the number of rounds being increased from the number of rounds. As jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, based on the game ball that entered the V-winning hole in the V-winning attacker, if it is possible to control the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V-winning attacker is opened or not and the opening time , the number of openings, or the termination condition of probability variable control, it may be possible to execute a lottery effect regarding jackpot game states with different advantages. Based on the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, when it is possible to control from a small winning gaming state to a jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V winning winning attacker is released, the opening time, the number of openings, or, Depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of a V winning prize, it may be possible to execute a lottery performance regarding a small winning gaming state or a jackpot gaming state with different degrees of advantage.

Until the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released is started, it is controlled to a weak vibration monitoring state, and after that, from the start of the gaming state in which the V-winning attacker can be released, the V is caused by the game ball entering the V-winning attacker. During the period until the winning occurs, the controller may be controlled to a strong vibration monitoring state, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. When a V winning prize occurs, the control is performed to a weak vibration monitoring state, and an effect including vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is easy to detect vibration errors, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is difficult to detect vibration errors than the strong vibration monitoring state. Control is performed to a strong vibration monitoring state during a period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled. When a vibration error is detected, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of an alarm image, output of an alarm sound, lighting of an alarm lamp, output of an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality is executable. If a vibration error is detected, the pachinko game machine 1 may be brought to a game stop state by the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100 or the like. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor vibrations and to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to notification of a vibration error or game stoppage due to inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 10-3 shows the settings of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance depending on the vibration mode of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. FIG. 10-3(A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation section effects. FIG. 10-3(B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration performance included in the specific linked performance.

The vibration pattern AKV01 has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary fluctuation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV02, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC02, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV03, the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation section performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color.

The vibration pattern AKV11 has an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKR1 when a reach is established. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation section effects that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes pink.

The vibration pattern AKV12 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKR2 when a reach is established. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes orange.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when a reach is established, a performance based on a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established may be performed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed when the reach is established and the operation part effect executed at the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

The vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS1 when the reach develops. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

The vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when the reach is developed, a performance based on a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed may be executed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation part effect executed at the start of pre-variation or target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration mode of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

In the vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period continues further until the player's action of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. I wish I could. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inciting the success or failure notification. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed, whether or not to provide an effective detection period may be changed depending on the type of effect executed in conjunction with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. good. If a valid detection period is provided, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A should be set to have a light emission mode that switches between golden light (lights on) and non-lights (lights off) every 150 milliseconds to suggest an operation. May be controlled. In addition, when the effective detection period is not provided, control may be performed so that the light emitting mode for the vibration effect is such that the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emits gold light continuously over the period of vibration. On the other hand, if a valid detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A be switched every 150 milliseconds between emitting red light (lit) and non-emitting light (lighting out) in a red color different from gold. It may be controlled to have a desired light emitting mode. By executing a light emission effect with a light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it can be confirmed that the operation of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is effective while executing the vibration effect. , can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers for which lamp control data can be set may be used to give different priorities for light emission control. For example, the first lamp layer has a light emission mode that switches the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A between red light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights out) every 150 milliseconds as a light emission mode for normal operation suggestion. Set the lamp control data. The second lamp layer is set with lamp control data that causes the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds as a light emission mode for suggesting special operations. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is controlled more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Execute with priority. As a result, the light emitting mode for suggesting a special operation may be controlled to be preferentially used as the light emitting mode for the light emitting effect than the light emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation.

The plurality of reach performances that become super reach may include a strong SP reach with relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with relatively low jackpot reliability. In the strong SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is executed after a motion detection performance is executed by detecting a player's motion that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the vibration effect is turned on until the player's movement that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. It is sufficient if the vibration mode continues for a period of time. In the weak SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is performed without performing a motion detection performance. When a vibration performance corresponding to such a weak SP reach performance is executed, the vibration pattern AKV31 may be activated at least 1500 milliseconds before the win/fail notification performance. Note that a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different between the operation section performance when the strong SP reach performance is executed and the operation performance when the weak SP reach performance is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to have a period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to vibrate every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to be switched between a period and an off period in which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may also be controlled in a vibration manner. A case may be provided in which the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation section effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed and the operation effect when the weak SP reach effect is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed, the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A will be activated to emit a golden light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The light emitting mode may be controlled to switch between (lighting up) and non-lighting (lighting out). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A is continuously activated for 2000 milliseconds by vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The operating lever or push button 31B may be controlled to emit a golden light.

The vibration pattern AKV41 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the screen display in the SP reach A reach effect. The vibration pattern AKV43 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to music playback in the SP reach A reach performance. The vibration pattern AKV44 has a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body movement in the reach effect of SP reach A, the light emitting color in the specific light emitting effect becomes blue as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV42 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach performance. In the specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach performance, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV43 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with music playback in the SP reach A reach performance, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance changes from blue to red to gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

The vibration by vibration pattern AKV44 may be a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot confirmation notification, or a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. There are cases where this happens. In the specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the emitted light color in the specific light emission performance becomes a rainbow color as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the light emitting color in the specific light emitting effect becomes white as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emitted light color in the specific light emitting effect becomes a rainbow color as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

FIG. 10-4 shows an example of performing an effect by causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown depending on the emitted light color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Note that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have a normal emission brightness set low in the normal emission state, and the emission color is set to a low level. It is sufficient if the light is emitted in a white color. Alternatively, in the normal light emitting state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to a non-emitting state in which they do not emit light.

A production execution example AKA01 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light. When executing the operation section performance using any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emitted light color becomes white. The operation section performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. Both of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22. Also when executing the jackpot type lottery CH1 as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes white.

A production execution example AKA02 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light. When executing the operation section effect using either the operation section effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the emitted light color becomes red. The operation section performance pattern AKC02 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC12 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The reliability of the jackpot is 70% or more for both the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC12. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC02 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section effect based on the operation section pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes red is included.

A production execution example AKA03 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light. When executing the operation section performance using either of the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored. The operation section effect pattern AKC03 can be used when executing the operation section effect at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC13 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The reliability of the jackpot is 100% for both the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored.

A production execution example AKA04 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit pink light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the emitted light color becomes pink. The operation section performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11.

Effect execution example AKA05 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit orange light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the emitted light color becomes orange. The operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation part performance based on the operation part performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12.

Effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit blue light. When executing the operation section effect, the emitted light color does not change to blue. When executing the movable body movement of SP Reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes blue. Furthermore, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes blue is included.

Effect execution example AKV07 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit gold light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the emitted light color becomes gold. The operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of notification of success or failure. The operation part performance based on the operation part performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31. When displaying an image of SP reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes gold. Also, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the emitted light colors of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the operation section performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode in the vibration performance. In addition to the luminous color, arbitrary luminous modes such as luminous time, luminous number (blinking number), luminous cycle (flashing cycle), and luminous brightness can also be determined by the execution timing of the operation section performance, jackpot reliability, and vibration in the vibration performance. Depending on the aspect, they may be different or common.

When executed at the start of advance variation, the operation section performance can be executed as a pre-read preview performance or a continuous preview performance. The pre-read preview performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance can be executed using continuous performance patterns for each number of pending memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of special symbols reserved at the time of starting winnings. As a continuous performance pattern for each number of pending memories, a plurality of continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special symbols stored at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 10-5 shows an example of setting a continuous effect pattern used to execute continuous preview effects. For the continuous performance pattern, for example, using a random value for determining the continuous performance pattern, refer to the continuous performance pattern determination table according to the number of reserved memories, and depending on the winning determination result, a determined value that matches the random value is assigned. The decision may be made by determining the decision result that has been determined.

FIG. 10-5(A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC11 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is performed.

FIG. 10-5(B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "3". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". When this is the case, the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 10-5(C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "4". In the continuous preview performance using continuous performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3". When the value is "0", the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as a prefetch notice setting process. In the pre-read notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-6, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-read notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables execution of the pre-read notice performance which is a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the production control command (starting opening winning designation command, pending storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the prefetch notice condition is not satisfied. When a command is received, the content of the notification based on the received command is specified, and the winning determination result is specified as the notification content based on the winning determination result command, for example.

The winning determination result uses the gaming random numbers extracted at the start of winning to determine whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a specific fluctuation pattern. , the result determined by the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. The winning determination result may indicate, for example, any one of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmed in case of loss, reach confirmed in case of loss, and general in case of loss. The jackpot winning determination result corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range, and corresponds to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The determination result at the time of winning when the super reach is confirmed in the event of a loss is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and it corresponds to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the confirmed super reach in the event of a loss. This is the judgment result. The determination result at the time of winning when the reach at the time of loss is confirmed is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, and the determination result corresponding to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determined range at the time of loss. It is. In the case of a loss, the general winning judgment result is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmed range nor within the reach confirmed range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result corresponding to.

It is only necessary that the pre-reading notice condition can be established when the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a losing super reach. In addition, if the current prize winning determination result is either jackpot or loss super reach confirmed, and all previous winning prize determination results corresponding to the pending memory are all loss general. may be possible. Note that if the execution of a pre-read notice performance that is a continuous notice performance has already been set to start, a restriction may be made so that the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied.

If the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-read notice setting process is ended. If the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the execution of a pre-read notice, and referring to the pre-read notice execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the winning determination result. Whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect may be determined by determining whether or not to perform a pre-read preview effect. In step AKS102, either "not executed" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is not executed, or "with execution" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is executed is determined. Regarding the determination result at this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that "execution is to be performed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-read preview setting process is ended. If it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of pending memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a continuous performance pattern, and referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared in advance according to the winning determination result, a continuous performance pattern can be created. may be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After determining the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105, a pre-read preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-read preview setting process is ended. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-read preview flag provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 may be set to an on state.

In such a pre-read notice setting process, if the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a loss-winning super reach, the pre-read notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the pre-read notice execution in step AKS102 can be performed. It becomes possible to determine the presence or absence and the continuous performance pattern based on step AKS105. Then, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, even if step AKS102 determines to execute the pre-read preview effect at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a loss and the super reach is confirmed. good. Further, in step AKS105, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate when the winning determination result is a jackpot than when the winning determination result is a loss and super reach is confirmed. In this way, it is only necessary to be able to execute a continuous preview performance that is a pre-read preview performance based on the winning determination result that is a pre-read determination result.

FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol etc. that will be the final decorative symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The production control CPU 120 displays the final stop symbol based on variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. All you have to do is decide. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are mainly performed by setting the command to be sent at the start of the special symbol fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the production control board 12. The variation pattern designation command is a production control command that designates the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a production control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random value for determining the special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents depending on the combination of fluctuation patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (lose)", "reach (lose)", "non-probable variable (jackpot)", and "probable variable (jackpot)". Good to have.

If the variable display content is "Non-reach (lose)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol will not change to the reach state, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a “lose”. If the variable display content is "Reach (Lose)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the "Reach" state, the determined decorative symbol of the Reach Loss combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be "Lose". becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability variable (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a probability variable state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that are the same even numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. In addition, when the variable display content is "probable change (jackpot)", it is sufficient if it is possible to determine a combination of determined ornamental symbols that are the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (lose)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that is a combination that is out of reach is determined as the final stop symbol. If the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols that will be a non-reach (loss) combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When determining a combination of fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data that is a random number value for determining the symbol, and referring to a symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 according to the variable display contents, What is necessary is to determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern.

After determining the final stop symbol, etc., the operation section performance is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-read preview effect is being executed. For example, if the pre-read preview flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. When the pre-read preview performance is being executed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operating section performance pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous performance pattern. The continuous effect pattern determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the prefetch notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, if it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not being executed, the presence or absence of the operation section performance and the operation section performance pattern corresponding to the current variable display may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, extract numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation part performance, and refer to the operation part performance determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not. It is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of the operation section performance, that is, whether or not to perform the operation section performance, and the operation section performance pattern used when executing the operation section performance. The operation part effects that are compatible with this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. . Therefore, within the scope of the variable display where the operation part effect included in the pre-read preview effect is executed, the operation part effect corresponding to this variable display has a limit so that it cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. There are restrictions such as:

In step AKS202, when a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with a specific effect based on the variation pattern, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted. For example, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be limited by determining not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, within the scope of the variable display in which the SP reach A reach effect is executed, a limit is set such that all operation section effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established, while it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established. Execution of the operation section performance may be restricted by determining not to perform the operation section performance at the timing corresponding to the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In this case, within the scope of the variable display where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit is set so that some operation part effects cannot be performed while the variable display is being executed. . In addition, within the scope of the variable display in which a specific performance is performed, a limit may be set so that it is difficult for some or all of the operation part performances to be performed while the variable display is being performed. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 that determines the operation section performance in step AKS202 can restrict the execution of the operation section performance including the vibration performance when the special vibration performance is executed.

In addition, in the case where the operation part performance is determined in step AKS202, when a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the winning determination result, etc., the performance is lower than when the special performance is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation section effects may be set so that some or all of the operation section effects are likely to be executed during execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation part performance, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the production control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared production control patterns (variable display production control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and sets it as the usage pattern. . Further, the performance control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared performance control patterns (operation unit performance control patterns) in response to the operation unit performance determined in step AKS202 and set it as the usage pattern. good. Further, for example, an initial value of a performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (performance control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, variations of decorative patterns and the like are started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by display control data included in the production control pattern (variable display production control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the start of variation, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display, etc., the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 10-8 shows a configuration example of the production control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 10-8(A) and an operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 10-8(B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 10-8(A) executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols in response to the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern specification command. Contains control data used to control the The operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 10-8(B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation section effect.

The variable display production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. . The production control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the production control process timer value that is the stored value of the production control process timer, and is a judgment value that corresponds to the execution time (production time) of each production operation. is set in advance. In addition, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, for example, the reception of a predetermined performance control command from the main board 11, or the execution of a predetermined process as a process for controlling the performance operation in the performance control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of production control, etc. may be set in response to predetermined control content or processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects and the like linked to the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating the light emission driving mode of the light emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs during the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of the light emitter during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's movements, such as a tilting operation on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on the trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and the effective detection period for each operation. It includes data indicating the performance operation mode according to the detection of the player's movement, such as data specifying the control details of the performance operation when the player's movement is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all production control patterns, but production control patterns that include some control data depending on the content of production operation by each production control pattern. There may be. Further, among the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may be different depending on the content of the production operation executed at each timing. In other words, some process data includes all of display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while others include only a portion of these data. It's fine. Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display production process in step S172 of the production control process process, each time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. controls performance operations according to various types of corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps, 9, a light emitting body such as a decorative LED, a vibration motor 131, a movable body 32, etc.). In addition, in each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and audio control data #1 to audio control are associated with performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n, and vibration control data #1 to vibration control data #n control the production operations in the production device. It constitutes production control execution data #1 to production control execution data #n that indicates the content and specifies the execution of production control.

The operation section production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation section performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitters in the operation section performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B is made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation section effect. The vibration control data of the operation section performance control pattern includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration generator in the operation section performance, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131, for example. That is, the vibration control data of the operation section performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance.

FIG. 10-9 shows an example of setting the timing at which the operation section performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 correspond to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern that becomes the preliminary variation is started, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance at the start of the preliminary variation can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, the operation part performance is executed in some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, depending on the remaining number of times. be able to. For example, when the remaining number of times is "3", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT01, and when the remaining number of times is "2", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times is is "1", the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 10-9 corresponds to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern that becomes the target change is started, and is the timing at which the operation section performance at the start of the target change can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, during some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the operation section according to the operation section performance pattern according to the remaining number of times. After executing the performance, at timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the operation unit performance can be performed using the operation unit performance pattern according to the remaining number of times “0”. Further, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, the operation section effect may become executable. Specifically, when one of the operation section performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. be able to.

Timings such as timings AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, which correspond to the case where the variable display of decorative patterns is started, may be such that the operation section performance can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. , the operation section effect may be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative pattern was started. In this way, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbols is started may be any timing that can be reached by starting the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in Figure 10-9 are the operation section effects corresponding to the current variable display, including the operation section presentation when a reach is established, the operation section presentation when the reach is developed, and the operation section presentation when the win/fail notification is triggered. Each timing is feasible. For example, depending on the operation section effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach has developed. In some cases, it becomes possible to execute the operation part effect, and in other cases, it becomes possible to execute the operation part effect at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is triggered. Specifically, when one of the operation section performance patterns AKC21 and AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. I can do it. Furthermore, when either of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. Alternatively, when the operation section performance pattern AKC41 is determined in step ASK202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is the time for inciting the success/failure notification.

FIG. 10-10 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 10-10(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 10-10(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 10-10(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 10-10(A), the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light becomes white in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect is such that during the on period of 300 ms, for example, the first brightness of the white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIG. 10-11 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 10-11(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuations. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 10-11(B). , can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 10-11(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are continuously displayed in red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect if the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is used. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs that make up the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in red, red-purple, blue-violet, blue, green, yellow, and orange colors that change depending on the elapsed time and the light-emitting position. , the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors. The light emitting position of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified in multiple sections, for example, the upper and lower parts of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and the light emission time, color, and light emission can be specified according to each section. It is sufficient if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIG. 10-12 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 10-12(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 10-12(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. As shown in FIG. 10-12(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 10-12(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is such that during the on period of 1500 ms, for example, the first brightness of the white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIG. 10-13 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 10-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 10-13(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 10-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 10-13(B). , can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. As shown in FIG. 10-13(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that when the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is used, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can emit red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC12 is a light emission mode in which the luminance brightness is changed in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC11. becomes. In this manner, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by varying not only the color of the light emitted but also the period of the light emitted as a display mode of the light emitting effect. Note that during the on-period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light emitting effect, while the light emitting cycle is the same, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by changing the light emitting color. In this way, for example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effect are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making the light emitting period common.

FIG. 10-14 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance according to the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR1 which is a performance when a reach is established as shown in FIG. It includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color is pink as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 10-14(C). The performance AKR1, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image indicating a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. As shown in FIG. 10-14(C), the vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated multiple times at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 10-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit pink light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off.

FIG. 10-15 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22. The operation unit performance according to the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR2 which is the performance when the reach is established as shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), This includes a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color is orange as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV12 as shown in FIG. 10-15(C). The performance AKR2, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image indicating a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. It is sufficient that the performance mode is different between the performance AKR1 and the performance AKR2, which are the performance when the reach is established. As shown in Figure 10-15 (C), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 milliseconds). After repeating the vibration twice alternately, a vibration mode including an on period of a second vibration on time (for example, 250 milliseconds) and an on period of a third vibration on time (for example, 500 milliseconds) is obtained. As shown in FIG. 10-15(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. Furthermore, when the on-periods of the vibration effects are different, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be made different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit light in orange. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit light in orange. The lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, in correspondence with the performances AKS1 and AKS2 that are the performance at the time of reach development, and the light emission color is white. , vibration effects using vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the performance AKS1. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2. As for the light emitting effects accompanying these vibration effects, in both of the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effects.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 can be executed corresponding to the success/failure agitation performance at timing AKT14, which is the time of the success/failure notification agitation, and includes a light emitting performance in which the emitted light color is gold, and a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31. ,including. The vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV31 has a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit gold light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect.

As shown in Figures 10-12 and 10-13, among the operation effects that can be performed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted light color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored. In this case, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white in accordance with the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm here. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13, which is when the reach is developed, include the operation part effects using the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. Contains things that In this way, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, have the same luminescent color, white, and the vibration effect. A case is provided in which the vibration mode of is different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that it is possible to use operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute light emission effects in which the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colors, such as operation unit effects using the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, and the vibration effect The vibration mode may also be different. As in the case where the emitted light color becomes white, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different. Contains things that are common. In addition, as in the case where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach develops, and the emission color The display may include different lighting modes. The operation section performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not need to include a light emission mode that is different from the operation section performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. All of these operation section performances have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing for inciting the success or failure notification, include those that execute a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes golden along with the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31, such as the operation section effect using the operation section effect pattern AKC41. I'm here. This operation section performance has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is common at 100% between the operation part performance executed at timing AKT12 when reach is established and the operation part performance performed at timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification is triggered, and the vibration performance A case is provided in which the vibration mode of is different. Further, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT14 when a win/fail notification is activated have different luminescent colors and different vibration modes of the vibration effect. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the jackpot reliability is the same, but the stick controller 31A is different due to the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the light emission mode of the light emission effect being different. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using operating members such as and push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target change starts are the operation unit effects based on the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, and the emitted light color becomes white, red, or rainbow color due to the vibration effects based on the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. It includes something that executes a light-emitting effect. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, and the vibration effect of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the aspects are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately varied. This can improve the game's interest.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. The operation section effects that can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, are the operation section effects using the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. contains things. In this way, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the values are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. It is possible to improve gaming interest by appropriately diversifying the game. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. It is possible to improve gaming interest by appropriately diversifying the game.

The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT14, which is the time of triggering the win/fail notification, the reliability of the jackpot is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing at which the vibration performance is executed. Furthermore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration production includes the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity due to the drive of the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong vibration and weak vibration in the vibration intensity, etc. , it is only necessary that the vibration patterns for vibrating the operating members such as the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made different.

The plurality of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game include movable body movement, image display, music playback, jackpot confirmation notification, and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the SP reach A reach performance. The reach effect of SP reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. Therefore, when the vibration effect is executed by the operation part effect, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher. Become. The movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the SP reach A reach effect are all executed as part of the reach effect, so they do not individually have jackpot reliability. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect that definitely informs that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. Jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to the reach effect of SP Reach A in that the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the player can undoubtedly recognize that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is different from a performance that has a high reliability of hitting a jackpot. In this way, among a plurality of specific performances, for a specific performance that has jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability will be higher if the vibration performance by the operation part performance is executed than if the specific performance is executed. It is sufficient if it is set as follows. Further, the reliability of the jackpot is set to be higher when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIGS. 10-16 show an example of performing an effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown depending on the execution mode of the performance using light emission.

Effect execution example AKF01 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit white light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is white. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the color of the emitted light becomes red along with a vibration effect.

Effect execution example AKF02 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit red light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC03 or AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored along with a vibration effect.

In the production execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are changed to the background display. At the same time, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operation section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to any of the operation section effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect.

Effect execution example AKF04 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit blue light that matches the character display when the character display on the image display device 5 is displayed in blue. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to any of the operation section effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect.

For example, a predetermined effect by displaying a background display, character display, or any other effect image on the image display device 5 can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, including variable display of decorative symbols. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the variable display, etc. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. There is. When an operation section effect is executed while such a predetermined effect is being executed, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to be controlled by a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect. It is possible to emit light in the following light emission mode. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the operation part performance is controlled using the control data read from the operation part performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. This control data includes lamp control data that controls the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data that controls the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In response to such a light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation section effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. It is. In this way, by making the light emitting modes different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, light emission can be achieved. It is possible to appropriately diversify the presentation and improve the interest in the game.

In addition to or in place of the screen display of the image display device 5, the predetermined effect may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this case, while causing the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit light in a color that matches the audio output such as BGM, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light may be emitted in the color of the light emitting effect in the part effect. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output audio that is a message that gives the player an impression of red color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light in accordance with the audio output. On the other hand, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. Even in this case, by making the light emission mode different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, , it is possible to appropriately diversify effects using light emission and improve game interest. The predetermined effect is to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turn off the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, right frame lamp 9N, etc. You can also use it as When this predetermined effect is executed, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by a vibration effect in the operation section effect. By executing the operation part effect while executing such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased for the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 10-17 shows an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movable body movement in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in conjunction with the image display in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ02 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold along with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with music playback in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emitting color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to red to gold due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV43. .

The period AKZ04 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in response to the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emitted from the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow-colored in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification includes stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative pattern, displaying a production image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach production, the speaker 8L, Any method that allows the player to recognize the jackpot by outputting a notification sound that confirms the jackpot with 8R, lighting up the jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the notification is to be executed.

It should be noted that, following the operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification is triggered, a specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ04 accompanying the jackpot confirmation notification may be performed. In this case, by executing a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with jackpot confirmation notification while the player's expectation is heightened by the operation section performance, it is possible to enhance the impression of the performance and improve the interest in the game. When performing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation section effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect may be different between the operation section effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emitting effect or specific light emitting effect may be different. The light emission mode may be made different. For example, the vibration intensity may be made different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The light emission brightness may be made different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By varying the vibration mode and light emitting mode to give a sharp presentation, it is possible to easily distinguish between the operation section presentation and the specific interlocking presentation, thereby appropriately diversifying the presentation and improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is a specific light emission in which when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the light emission color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes white due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes performance. A specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow-colored due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes light-emitting effects.

FIGS. 10-18 to 10-20 show the case where SP reach A reach effect is executed. FIG. 10-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body motion in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 10-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when image display in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 10-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the SP reach A reach performance.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach mode and the normal ready-to-reach presentation is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be any position in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach performance of SP reach A is started due to reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, and the movable body movement is performed as in the performance execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by upward linear movement or parallel movement from the initial position, and at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32, "SP An effect image showing a message such as "Reach A" is displayed. Thereafter, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the production execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is..." is displayed.

With the change in the position of the movable body 32 resulting in movable body movements such as performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed together with the movable body movement in the reach effect of SP Reach A include a special vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in Figure 10-17. , contains. Furthermore, when the position change of the movable body 32 continues and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front of the upper end on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the production execution example AKG03, the specific linked production in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches from the front of the lower end to the front of the upper end with respect to the initial position of the display screen is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated during this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the lever or push button 31B is vibrated. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, the special vibration performance may be performed in a vibration manner in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched every 250 milliseconds between an on period in which the stick controller vibrates and an off period in which it does not vibrate. Further, the specific light emission effect may be executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emits blue light over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between blue light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights off) every 250 milliseconds. Good too.

When a movable body operation in a reach performance of SP reach A such as production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the position of the movable body 32 in the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N is changed, for example. Accordingly, light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the light emission color and luminance gradually change from the bottom to the top. For example, in the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the emitted light color changes to blue, and the emitted light brightness changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time. All you have to do is emit light.

After the movable body movement is completed as in the performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as an image display in the SP reach A reach performance as in the performance execution example AKG11. At this time, for example, text indicating the message "Super Hot" is displayed in gold. Further, as in the production execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Along with the display of performance images such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific linked performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV42, a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes gold, and Contains. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of a performance image in a reach performance different from the text display starts, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific linked performance in period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "Very Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and during this period AKZ02, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated. A special vibration effect may be executed in a different manner. In addition, during the period AKZ02, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is set to a light emitting mode that alternately repeats the first brightness, which has a high golden light emitting brightness, and the second brightness, which has a low light emitting brightness, every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A like effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. It is sufficient that the emitted light color is gold in accordance with the image display and the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, as the effect images are displayed as in the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N change to gold color, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image starts, it is sufficient to emit light in a color different from gold.

After the display of the performance image as in the performance execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is outputted by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the performance execution example AKG21 as music reproduction in the reach performance of SP reach A. Subsequently, as in production execution example AKG22, the speakers 8L and 8R output the audio of the music phrase PH02. Thereafter, as in production execution example AKG23, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is sufficient to be able to reproduce the entire music in the SP reach A reach performance by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 in accordance with the progress of the performance.

In accordance with the output of the sound that plays music such as the performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking performance that is executed with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A is a special vibration performance with a vibration pattern AKV43 and a change in the light emitting color from blue to red during the period AKZ03 shown in Figure 10-17. It includes a specific light emitting effect that changes from red to gold. In the production execution example AKG21, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. In the production execution example AKG22, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. In the production execution example AKG23, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of a plurality of musical phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output as the effect progresses.

FIG. 10-21 shows a music reproduction execution example AKH01 in which the musical scale changes in order as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), during the period AKZ03 during which the specific interlocking effect can be executed with music playback, each of C, R, E, F, G, A, C, and C is displayed. Sound corresponding to the musical scale is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the C scale that is output last may be one octave higher than the C scale that is output first.

Such specific interlocking effects that accompany music playback include a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color changes as shown in Figure 10-21 (B), and a special light emission effect that uses a vibration pattern as shown in Figure 10-21 (C). It includes a vibration effect, which is a vibration effect, and can be executed in a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 10-21(C) has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated a plurality of times in accordance with the output period of the audio corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), the specific light emitting effect accompanying this special vibration effect is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the ON period of the special vibration effect. The emitted light color changes sequentially from blue to red to gold. During the stop period of the audio output and the off period of the special vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and need only be turned off. Note that during the audio output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be made different for each scale. For example, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is made to emit blue light continuously over a period of time during which the first C scale is output. Next, during a certain period of the ``R'' scale, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in a light emission mode that alternately repeats a first brightness with a high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness. Thereafter, during a period of the Mi scale, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit light in a light emitting mode that switches between golden light emitting (lighting up) and non-emitting light (lighting out). In this way, by providing a light emitting mode in which the amount of light emitted differs depending on the color of light corresponding to each musical scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the performance and improve the interest in the game.

The reach performance of SP reach A is executable controlled by using control data read from the variable display performance control pattern in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 10-8(A) uses lamp control data and vibration control data to perform specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A. It is set to be able to execute specific linked effects. In the specific interlocking performance, it is possible to execute a special vibration performance using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration performance using any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance using the vibration pattern in the operation section performance. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration performance in the operation part performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific linked performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance, so that the stick controller 31A and It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

When performing the operation section effect, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light using the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, along with the vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When performing a specific interlocking effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are used to vibrate the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, along with a special vibration effect that vibrates the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emitting effect that causes light to emit light is executed. By executing an effect that includes vibration and light emission of the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, the player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, can enjoy the image display. By recognizing the vibrations and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the performance can be increased.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 10-17, with the movement of the movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP reach A, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to perform the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the game's interest.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 10-17, in response to the jackpot confirmation notification, a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to notification that the jackpot game state is being controlled, it is possible to appropriately diversify effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B, thereby improving the game's interest. be able to.

The specific interlocking performance includes a specific light emission performance in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in conjunction with a special vibration performance based on any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emitting performance accompanying the vibration performance in the operation section performance and the specific light emission performance accompanying the special vibration performance in the specific interlocking performance differ in light emitting modes such as emitted light color. In this way, by changing the light emission mode depending on the operation part performance and the specific interlocking performance, the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Can be done.

As shown in Figures 10-10 and 10-11, among the operation effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted light color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colored. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 10-12 and 10-13, among the operation effects that can be performed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted color is white, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow-colored. A vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing to be executed is different between the vibration effects of the operation part effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary variation, and the vibration effects of the operation part effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. In addition to being different, the vibration modes are also different. In addition, the emitted light color is white and red for the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the preliminary variation, and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect, which can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. By being one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, by providing a case in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different while the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is the same when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, operations such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be performed. The interest in the game can be improved by appropriately diversifying the effects using the members.

The vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary variation, is executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning judgment result, which is the pre-read judgment result. Executed in the variable display before the variable display to be executed. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit performances are performed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 10-10 and 10-11, among the operation effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted light color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colored. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow color. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance is an operation part performance pattern in which the light emitting color differs depending on whether the remaining number of times is other than "0" or when the remaining number of times is "0". There are some that include. For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 10-5(A) is the operation section performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and the operation section performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , contains. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect of the operation element effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the time when the target change starts. The light emission mode differs between the two. In this way, by providing cases in which the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. is set to prevent it from becoming worse. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 10-5(A), if the operation part performance pattern is AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0" This is set to prevent the operation section performance pattern AKC11 from occurring. If the operation part performance pattern AKC03 is when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern AKC11 or the operation part performance pattern AKC12 will be used as the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation section effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later, such as at the start of the target variation, even though the operation section effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the preliminary variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without lowering the player's expectations.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-10 and 10-11, among the operation effects that can be performed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is Including cases where the emitted light is white, and cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color different from white, when the emitted light color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period and off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. and non-emission are repeated, and when the emitted light color becomes red, it emits light continuously in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in Figures 10-12 and 10-13, among the operation effects that can be performed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is different from white, such as red or rainbow color, and when the emitted color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and the emitted light color becomes red. In this case, the light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Since the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 have different on-period settings, the light emission modes such as the light emission period in the light emission effects will differ. Even in this case, it is only necessary to provide a case where the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation section effect is different.

(Modified examples of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation part performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1, etc.

Regarding the operation part effects, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the settings of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value of . In addition, regarding the operation part performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages.

If the timing of executing the operation part effect is different or the same, if the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different or the same, or if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different or the same, the jackpot reliability will be Combinations in each case, such as different cases and common cases, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the timing of execution is different or the same for the operation part effect and the specific linked effect, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect is different or the same, the light emission mode of the light emission effect or specific light emission effect. The combinations in each case, such as when the numbers are different and when they are the same, can be arbitrarily set depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by making the light emission modes of the light emission effects common. When the light emission modes of the light emission effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common. When some vibration modes in the vibration effects are different, it is only necessary to reduce the control burden of the vibration effects by making other vibration modes in the vibration effects common. For example, when the vibration intensities of the vibration performances are different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the vibration performances can be reduced by making the vibration periods of the vibration performances common. When some light emitting modes in a light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient if the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect common. For example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effects are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effects can be reduced by making the light emitting cycle common in the light emitting effects. It is sufficient if the control burden can be reduced by similarly standardizing the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to or instead of executing the variable display, when the game is controlled to be in any game state such as a small win game state or a jackpot game state, the operation section performance or specific interlocking performance is executed. It may be possible. For example, when the game is controlled to be a small winning game state, a predetermined percentage is determined depending on whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times the player is opened, or the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of the V winning attacker. It may also be possible to perform the operation section performance with. When controlled in a jackpot gaming state, the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the jackpot gaming state ends, the termination conditions, and the rank-up that will result in an increased number of rounds than the number of rounds announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may also be possible to perform the operation section effect at a predetermined rate depending on the presence or absence, amount of increase, etc. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with a specific performance, such as movable object movement, image display, and music playback in a small winning game state or a jackpot gaming state.

The specific performance that can be executed as a specific interlocking performance may be any performance that can be executed depending on the execution of the variable display, or may be any performance that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, if a variable display result at a predetermined rate becomes a "jackpot" and a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, a certain It may also be possible to perform linked effects.

When controlled to an arbitrary performance state, an operation section performance or a specific interlocking performance may be made executable. For example, when the production state is controlled to be a special production mode, the operation part production or specific linked production is performed at a higher rate than when the production state is controlled to a production state that is a production mode different from the special production mode. It may be possible.

The operating member capable of performing effects using vibrations or light emission may be any motion detecting member configured to be able to detect the player's motion. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects a contact operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Furthermore, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined action by a player may be used, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. The player's actions may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands or the like using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined action by a player may be used. Along with such a motion detection member, a contact member that can be touched by a player's hand or the like may be provided, and the contact member may vibrate or emit light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. .

The vibration effects included in the operation section effects can correspond to the vibration effects in the feature part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effects in the feature part 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation section effects, the vibration effects included in the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the pre-variation start times, can correspond to the first vibration effects in the characteristic section 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts can correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic unit 50AK. The light emitting effects included in the operation part effects include a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the feature part 48AK, a light emitting effect accompanying a predetermined vibration effect in the feature part 49AK, and a light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Compatible with light emitting effects. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, are the light emitting effects associated with the first vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. Can be adapted to performances. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, are the light emitting effects associated with the second vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. I can handle it. The special vibration performance included in the specific linked performance can correspond to the special vibration performance in the feature section 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 operates. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base state) can be achieved without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. ).

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the winning symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for small winning symbols, a random number for jackpot lottery determination, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols, such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display number of the time-saving state (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state, no matter which random number is used for the lottery. . However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time saving state, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not selected, this may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, there can be a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Furthermore, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may differ depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

In addition, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is set when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a specified number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and an operation means that is accompanied by the vibration performance. and a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that emits light. The rate at which the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed. The aspects are different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration presentation is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section presentation pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed means that, for example, it is possible to win a jackpot depending on the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be something like reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, as long as it is the emission color and vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation section effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emitting mode may be a case where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode, The vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when they are executed. The aspects may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, and the vibration mode may also be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the advanced effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means It may also be possible to perform the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a vibration production that can perform a predetermined vibration production and a special vibration production as a vibration production in which the operation means vibrates. The predetermined vibration effect includes an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect in which the operating means emits light in accordance with a predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of the game. The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when a predetermined vibration effect is executed than when it is not executed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the situation, and the vibration performance execution means can execute a special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of a specific performance, and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. . Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. Bye. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific performance may be, for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration performance is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section performance pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed depends on, for example, the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be anything such as jackpot reliability. The fact that the special vibration performance can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration performance during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when an advanced performance is executed after the variable display becomes a ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emitting mode may be a case where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color, for example. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready mode may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. . Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing or the second timing. It may also be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance before the predetermined vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation level of 50% or more, which is higher than when the SP reach A reach effect is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

The specific performance execution means may be able to execute a performance that causes the movable member to operate as the specific performance, and the vibration performance execution unit may be capable of executing a special vibration performance during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration performance in response to notification that the control is in an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot confirmation notification. The special vibration effect accompanying this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The light emitting effect execution means is capable of executing a specific light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emission mode is different between the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect accompanying the special vibration effect. Good too. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission mode may be different, for example, if the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from the case where the light emission color is blue, gold, or changes from blue to gold through red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

When the special vibration performance is executed, a restriction means for restricting the execution of the predetermined vibration performance may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 when determining the operation section performance in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and is capable of performing a first vibration performance and a second vibration performance as a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates. The apparatus includes a vibration performance execution means and a light emission performance execution means capable of executing a light emission performance that causes the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the vibration performance, and when the vibration performance is performed, the vibration performance is better than when the vibration performance is not performed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance, and the timing at which the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance are executed is different. are different, and the vibration modes are different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration presentation is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section presentation pattern. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect may be different, for example, as long as it is the jackpot reliability depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be performed at different timings, for example, as long as the preliminary fluctuation start timings AKT01 to AKT03 are different from the target fluctuation start timing AKT11. The vibration mode may be different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect is, for example, when the light emission color included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow color. etc. is fine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is controlled to be in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is different from the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in one light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emitting mode may be a case where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is changed by the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display starts, and the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. They are common, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the notification performance is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, and even if the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Good too. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It may also be possible to emit light. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the second vibration performance can be executed in a common vibration manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance performance execution means It may be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance at one timing and before the second vibration performance is performed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration performance in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration performance is executed, based on the pre-read determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage may be, for example, a variable display that is a prior change.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a light emitting mode during the first vibration and a light emitting mode during the second vibration which is different from the light emitting mode during the first vibration, and the light emitting effect is the light emitting mode during the first vibration. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emission mode during the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The light emitting mode during the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the emitted light color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode is different because, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" depending on the continuous effect pattern, the light emission color of the operation part effect pattern is different from when the remaining number of times is "0". Good to have.
In such a configuration, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual feature parts that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other feature parts, as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 57AK and 58AK)
In the feature parts 57AK and 58AK, while one variable display is being executed, multiple types of preview effects are displayed, such as pseudo-coupled variation in pseudo-coupling presentation, notice after reach establishment, reach development presentation, battle command presentation, win/fail branch presentation, and operation. It is possible to perform a partial performance or a combination of some or all of these. When it is possible to execute such a plurality of types of preview effects, the characteristic parts 57AK and 58AK can execute preview suggestion effects that suggest any of the preview effects at a predetermined rate. The preview suggestion performance is started before the target preview performance is executed, and depending on the display mode of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to determine whether the target preview performance will be executed or the execution timing. It is good if it can be suggested. In the advance notice suggestion performance, the display mode of the performance image changes according to the progress of the performance as the execution time elapses. The change in the display mode of the performance image in the preview suggestion performance is also referred to as the display operation in the preview suggestion performance. The display mode of the performance image that can be changed in the preview suggestion performance may be any shape, pattern, or color shown by the performance image, or a combination of some or all of these. The display of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 based on the advance notice suggestion effect is also referred to as advance notice suggestion display.

The preview suggestion effects in the feature section 57AK include specific change effects, movement effects, and position change effects. The specific change performance is a performance that changes the display mode of a suggestion display suggesting a preview performance to a specific mode in response to the execution of the preview performance. The moving performance is a performance that moves a predetermined display related to the suggestion display toward the suggestion display before the preview performance is executed. The position change performance is a performance that changes the display position of the suggestion display.

Multiple types of suggestion displays may be displayed selectively or simultaneously, and part or all of the display format may be a common display format regardless of the type of suggestion display. In this case, confusion among players can be prevented by using a common display mode regardless of the type of suggestion display. Alternatively, some or all of the display modes may be different depending on the type of suggestion display. In this case, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the display mode of the suggestion display.

The preview suggestion performance in the feature section 58AK includes a suggestion action performance and a special action performance. The suggestive action performance is a performance that causes the display of a character image that suggests a preview performance to perform a suggestive action. The special action performance is a performance in which a character image is displayed in a predetermined manner and then performs a special action different from the suggested action during a period until the suggested action performance is executed. After the special action performance is executed, the character image display is caused to perform a predetermined operation, and then the suggested action performance can be executed.

A plurality of types of character images may be displayed selectively or simultaneously, and part or all of the display operation may be a common operation regardless of the type of character image. In this case, confusion among players can be prevented by performing common actions regardless of the type of character image. Alternatively, some or all of the display operations may differ depending on the type of character image. In this case, the display of character images can be diversified to improve the interest in the game.

In the starting winning determination processing of step S101 included in the special symbol process processing, it is possible to execute the sending setting of the command at the time of starting opening winning. The starting opening winning command includes a starting opening winning designation command, a pending storage number notification command, and a winning determination result command. The starting opening winning designation command is a production control command that designates the occurrence of a starting winning. The pending storage number notification command is a command that specifies the pending storage number. The prize winning determination result command is an effect control command that specifies the determination result of the pre-read determination.

FIG. 11-1(A) shows a setting example of the starting opening winning designation command, the pending storage number notification command, and the winning determination result command. The starting opening winning designation command includes a command B100H that is a first starting opening winning designation command, and a command B200H that is a second starting opening winning designation command. Note that the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. The pending storage number notification command includes a command C1XXH which is a first pending storage number notification command, and a command C2XXH which is a second pending storage number notification command. Note that XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. In the pending memory number notification command, different EXT data (for example, any one of 00H to 04H) is set depending on the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number. For the command C4XXH, which is a winning determination result command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result of the pre-read determination.

When the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting prize) occurs, the first pending memory number is The first starting condition is satisfied by determining that the upper limit value has not been reached. The first starting condition is a condition for executing a special pattern game (first special pattern game) using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. When the first starting condition is satisfied, a first starting opening winning designation command, a winning determination result command, and a first pending storage number notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. When the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, the second pending memory number is The second starting condition is satisfied by determining that the maximum value has not been reached. The second starting condition is a condition for executing a special pattern game (second special pattern game) using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B. When the second starting condition is satisfied, a second starting opening winning designation command, a winning determination result command, and a second pending storage number notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

On the production control board 12 side, the establishment of the first starting condition can be detected by receiving the first starting opening winning designation command, and the establishment of the second starting condition can be detected by receiving the second starting opening winning designation command. can. In this way, the first starting opening winning designation command is an effect control command that notifies the establishment of the first starting condition. The second starting opening winning designation command is an effect control command that notifies the establishment of the second starting condition. The winning determination result command is when a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening is detected, or when a gaming ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (winning determination result) using the gaming random numbers extracted from the random number circuit 104 (random numbers for determining special figure display results, etc.) is sent to the production control board 12. Notice. The first pending memory number notification command notifies the first special figure pending memory number. The second pending memory number notification command notifies the second special figure pending memory number.

FIG. 11-1(B) shows an example of the notification contents by the winning determination result command. Among the winning determination result commands, command C402H, command C403H, and command C404H may be sent when the random number for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range, and the display result of the special figure game may be The winning determination result is notified that the jackpot game state will not be controlled due to the determination of "loss". On the other hand, command C401H is transmitted when the random number value for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and the display result of the special figure game is determined to be a "jackpot", thereby controlling the jackpot game state. We will notify you of the winning determination result (variable display content is "Jackpot"). Note that the command C400H notifies that the winning determination is restricted. Command C402H is sent when the random value for determining the variation pattern is within the confirmed range of super reach at the time of loss, and the winning determination result (variable display content is ``Super reach confirmed in case of loss'') will be notified. On the other hand, the command C403H is sent when the random value for determining the variation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss, and the winning determination result (variable The display content will notify you that "Reach is confirmed in case of loss"). Furthermore, command C404H is sent when the random number value for determining the variation pattern is neither within the Super Reach confirmed range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmed range, and there is a possibility that the winning variation pattern with the reach effect may not be determined. Notify the result of the time judgment (variable display content is "General when losing"). In this way, the winning determination result command uses the gaming random numbers extracted at the time of starting winning to determine whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether it is determined to be a specific fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted as determination result information that notifies the winning determination result.

FIG. 11-2 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern regarding the characteristic parts 57AK and 58AK. These variation patterns may be prepared in advance so that they can be used in place of some or all of the variation patterns in the above embodiments, or in combination with some or all of the variation patterns in the above embodiments. The plurality of variation patterns have different special symbol variation times and variable display modes of decorative symbols. The special symbol variation time is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game such as the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The plurality of variation patterns include variation patterns corresponding to any of "non-reach", "reach", and "jackpot". "Non-reach" is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols becomes "non-reach loss." ``Reach'' is a case where a determined decorative pattern of a reach combination that is not a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols becomes ``Reach Loss.'' A "jackpot" is a case where the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols becomes a "jackpot." The fluctuation pattern corresponding to "non-reach" is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach" is a reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "jackpot" is a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are also collectively referred to as the loss variation pattern. Reach fluctuation patterns and jackpot fluctuation patterns include a "normal" fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is stopped and displayed after executing a reach effect that becomes a normal reach, and a "super reach" after executing a reach effect that becomes a normal reach. This includes a "super" variation pattern in which the variable display results are stopped and displayed after a reach effect that develops into a reach effect and becomes a super reach effect. The reach performances that are super reach include super A and super B reach performances, which have different performance modes.

The plurality of variation patterns include variation patterns that allow execution of pseudo-continuous variation in pseudo-continuous performance. In the pseudo-continuous display, the decorative symbols are once temporarily stopped in a temporary stop mode during the variable display, and then the variable display is restarted by pseudo-continuous variation. It is sufficient that the pseudo continuous variation can be executed up to a predetermined number of times, such as once or twice. When the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the determination ratio of the variation pattern may be set so that the jackpot reliability is higher than when the pseudo continuous variation is not executed. When the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is large, the determination ratio of the variation pattern may be set so that the jackpot reliability is higher than when the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is small.

FIG. 11-3 shows the execution timing and execution period of the preview effects corresponding to the variation patterns PC2-3 and PC3-3. The variation pattern PC2-3 is included in the reach variation pattern corresponding to "reach" among the loss variation patterns, and can execute the super B reach effect after executing the pseudo continuous variation twice. The variation pattern PC3-3 is included in the jackpot variation patterns corresponding to the "jackpot", and can execute the super B reach effect after executing the pseudo continuous variation twice.

The total symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 11-3 corresponds to the period in which decorative symbols are variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The left and right center symbol deceleration indicates a period in which the variable display of decorative symbols is decelerated and stopped (temporarily stopped) in the order of left → right → center in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. The end of the first fluctuation is the timing at which the period corresponding to the first fluctuation ends by temporarily stopping the variable display in the pseudo-continuous performance. The timing of the end of the first variation is the timing of the start of the first pseudo continuous variation, and the first pseudo continuous variation is started in the pseudo continuous performance. The end of the first pseudo continuous variation is the timing at which the period corresponding to the first pseudo continuous variation ends by temporarily stopping the variable display in the pseudo continuous effect. The timing of the end of the first pseudo continuous variation is the timing of the start of the second pseudo continuous variation, and the second pseudo continuous variation is started in the pseudo continuous performance. The left and right symbol deceleration indicates a period in which the variable display of decorative symbols is decelerated in a predetermined order (for example, from left to right) or simultaneously in the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The reach establishment is the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode by stopping and displaying the common decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R.

Following the timing of reach establishment, a normal period begins, and reach performance of normal reach becomes possible. At this time, the timing of the notice after the reach is achieved, and the notice effect that becomes the notice after the reach is established can be executed. After that, during the reach development period, a reach development performance is executed. The reach development performance is a performance that can notify the development of the reach by executing the reach performance of the super reach after the reach performance of the normal reach is executed. When the reach development performance ends, the first half of the super reach period begins, and the first half of the super reach reach performance becomes executable. Then, during the battle command period, the battle command performance becomes executable. The battle command performance is a performance that can notify a predetermined command by, for example, displaying a cut-in performance image that reports a predetermined message. It may be possible to set a plurality of types of display colors, such as "blue", "red", and "gold", as the display color when the battle command performance is executed. This display color may be any color set to fill in the frame surrounding the character string that notifies the message. Alternatively, it may be a set color for character display indicating a character string for notifying a message. Alternatively, it may be the setting color of an effect image added outside the frame surrounding the character string that notifies the message. The display color in the battle command performance is "gold" with the highest jackpot reliability, "red" with lower jackpot reliability than "gold", and "blue" with the highest jackpot reliability. It may be set to be the lowest. When the battle command performance ends, a period of success/failure branching begins, and the success/failure branching performance becomes executable. The win/fail branch performance may be any performance included in the second half of the super reach performance, for example, by branching into different performance modes depending on the jackpot reliability. Following the win/fail branch period, there is a win/fail reporting inciting period, and the inciting performance before the win/fail notification performance can be executed. Then, the winning/failure reporting period begins, and the winning/failure reporting to notify whether or not the variable display result is a "jackpot" becomes executable.

In addition, in response to the timing of a reach, it is possible to perform an operation section performance when a reach is achieved. In response to the timing at which the reach development period starts, etc., the operation section performance at the time of reach development can be executed. Corresponding to the timing at which the period for inciting the success/failure notification is started, the operation section performance at the time of inciting the success/failure notification can be executed.

The pseudo-continuation variation in the pseudo-continuation performance, the notice after the reach is established, the reach development performance, the battle command performance, and the win/fail branch performance all give a notice that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. It could be a preview performance. These preview performances can be set to suggest whether or not to be executed or the timing of execution by a preview suggestion performance. In addition, an operation section effect when a ready-to-win is established may be executed in conjunction with a notice after the ready-to-win is established. In conjunction with the reach development performance, an operation unit performance at the time of reach development may be performed. The operation part performance at the time of the success/failure agitation may be performed in conjunction with the agitation performance prior to the success/failure notification performance. Such an operation part performance can also be included in a target preview performance that suggests whether or not to be executed and the timing of execution by a preview suggestion display. These preview performances are also referred to as variable display performances that can be executed during variable display.

Timings 57AKT01 to 57AKT07 used for suggesting preview effects are set in advance in response to variable display using either of the variable patterns PC2-3 and PC3-3 as shown in FIG. 11-3. Timing 57AKT01 is a timing set to suggest that the first pseudo continuous variation will be executed as a preview performance. Timing 57AKT02 is a timing set to suggest that the second pseudo continuous variation will be executed as a preview effect. Timing 57AKT03 is a timing set to suggest that a notice will be executed after the reach is achieved as a notice effect. Timing 57AKT04 is a timing set to suggest that a reach development performance will be executed as a preview performance. Timing 57AKT05 is a timing set to suggest that a battle command performance will be executed as a preview performance. Timing 57AKT06 is a timing set to suggest that a win/fail branch effect will be executed as a preview effect. Timing 57AKT07 is a timing set to suggest that the operation part effect at the time of winning or failing will be executed as a preview effect.

FIG. 11-4 shows an example of setting a variable display effect combination pattern. The variable display performance combination pattern is a pattern indicating a combination of preview performances during execution of the variable display, and a plurality of patterns are prepared depending on the combination of preview performances to be executed. The variable display performance combination patterns AKP00 to AKP10 shown in FIG. 11-4(A) are patterns showing combinations of preview performances in response to the case where the operation part performance is not executed. The variable display combination patterns AKQ01 to AKQ22 shown in FIG. 11-4(B) are patterns indicating combinations of advance notice effects in response to the case where the operation section effects are executed.

FIG. 11-5 shows an example of setting the character display area. It is only necessary that a plurality of character display areas can be set on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the execution timing of the preview effect during execution of the variable display. The plurality of character display areas may be set as long as they can be set according to the special figure fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern or the execution timing of the preview performance accompanying the execution of the variable display. In the preview suggestion performance, a performance image serving as a character image can be displayed in a character display area corresponding to the execution timing of the preview performance that is the target of the suggestion, among a plurality of character display areas. At this time, the display of the character image becomes a suggestive display that suggests a preview performance.

FIG. 11-5(A) shows an example of setting the character display areas AKB0 to AKB7 in the case of the variable display effect combination pattern AKQ22 based on the variable pattern PC3-3. FIG. 11-5(B) shows the contents of preview effects and the like corresponding to the character display areas AKB0 to AKB7. The character display area AKB0 is a display position of a character image set for notification of suggestion preparation. Before the execution of the preview suggestion performance, a preparation notification display may be performed to inform that the execution of the preview suggestion performance is being prepared. When this preparation notification display is performed, a character image is displayed in the character display area AKB0. The character display area AKB1 is a display position of a character image set to suggest that the first pseudo continuous variation will be executed as a preview effect. The character display area AKB2 is a display position of a character image set to suggest that the second pseudo continuous variation will be executed as a preview effect. The character display area AKB3 is a display position of a character image set to suggest that a notice will be executed after reaching a reach as a notice effect. The character display area AKB4 is a display position of a character image set to suggest that a reach development performance will be executed as a preview performance. The character display area AKB5 is a display position of a character image set to suggest that a battle command performance will be executed as a preview performance. The character display area AKB6 is a display position of a character image set to suggest that a win/fail branch effect will be executed as a preview effect. The character display area AKB7 is a display position of a character image set to suggest that an operation part effect at the time of winning or failing will be executed as a preview effect.

Note that the setting of the character display area may be different depending on the combination of the variable pattern and the variable display effect. For example, in a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation based on a pseudo continuous effect is executed once, the execution timing of the pseudo continuous variation may be set to any one of a plurality of timings. In this case, the character display area AKB1 may be set at different display positions depending on the execution timing of the pseudo continuous variation. In addition, for example, in the case of a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is not executed, such as when variation pattern PA2-1 is selected, the display position similar to the character display area AKB1 is a preview effect in which a preview is executed after reach is established. The display position of the character image may be set to suggest that. In this case, the continuation suggestion display may be performed at the same display position as the character display area AKB1, or the suggestion target display may be performed.

FIGS. 11-6 to 11-9 show examples of effect display for a plurality of effect images that can be used for advance notice suggestion effects. The preview suggestion effect includes a case in which a effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed and a case in which a effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed as the display of the character image. The character image display may include a single display in which either one of the characters 57AKA and 57AKB is displayed and a double display in which both the characters 57AKA and 57AKB are displayed in one advance notice suggestion performance.

An effect display example 57AK101 shown in FIG. 11-6(A) shows a case where a preparation notification display is performed using an effect image showing the character 57AKA. The preparation notification display of the performance display example 57AK101 may be any display mode that allows the player or the like to recognize that the execution of the advance notice suggestion performance using the character 57AKA is being prepared. The preparation notification display of production display example 57AK101 is performed in the character display area AKB0 set for suggestion preparation notification. In the preparation notification display of the effect display example 57AK101, the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKA serving as the suggestion display may be operated in the preparation notification mode. The preparation notification mode in the effect display example 57AK101 may be any display mode as long as the effect image showing the character 57AKA is enlarged/reduced in a predetermined period.

The preparation notification mode in the effect display example 57AK101 is such that, for example, the effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed at a predetermined period in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, or a predetermined direction that is a combination of some or all of these directions. The display mode may be a swaying motion in which the screen oscillates. The preparation notification mode in the effect display example 57AK101 may be, for example, a display mode in which a display color changes at a predetermined period in a part or all of the effect image showing the character 57AKA. In addition, the preparation notification mode for displaying the effect image showing the character 57AKA is an operation display mode that can change part or all of the shape, pattern, and color of the character 57AKA shown by the display of the effect image at a predetermined period. good. In this way, by displaying the character image in a preparation notification mode before the preview suggestion presentation is started, it is sufficient to notify the user that the execution of the preview suggestion display is being prepared in a recognizable manner. The preparation notification display in which the character 57AKA is displayed in a display mode that is a preparation notification mode is a preparation motion performance in which the display of a performance image showing the character 57AKA is performed in a preparation motion.

An effect display example 57AK102 shown in FIG. 11-6(B) shows a case where a change suggestion display using an effect image showing the character 57AKA is performed. The change suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK102 may be a special display mode that allows the player or the like to recognize that the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKA is to be changed. In the change suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK102, the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKA serving as the suggestion display may be operated in a change suggestion mode. The change suggestion mode in the effect display example 57AK102 may be any display mode that is a change suggestion operation in which, for example, the display color of the effect image showing the character 57AKA changes and an effect image is added to the effect image showing the character 57AKA. In addition, the change suggestion mode in the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKA may be any action display mode that can change some or all of the shape, pattern, and color of the character 57AKA shown by the display of the effect image. The change suggestion display that displays the character 57AKA in a display mode that is a change suggestion mode is a specific action effect that causes the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKA to perform a specific action.

After the preparation notification display of the production display example 57AK101 is performed, for example, when execution of the preview suggestion production using the character 57AKA is started in response to the start of the variable display, the preparation performed in the character display area AKB0 is started. The notification display changes to a change suggestion display in the same character display area AKB0. Thereafter, the display position of the performance image showing the character 57AKA is changed to one of the character display areas AKB1 to AKB7, depending on the execution timing of the preview performance to be suggested by the preview suggestion performance. The effect in which the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKA is changed is included in the position change effect.

The effect display example 57AK103 shown in FIG. 11-6(C) and the effect display example 57AK104 shown in FIG. 11-6(D) show the case where the execution of the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKA is started. In response to the start of the variable display, a position change effect is executed for the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKA serving as the suggestion display, thereby starting the variable display of the decorative pattern accompanied by the preview effect that is the target of the suggestion. At this time, execution of a preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKA is started. The preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKA includes the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKA as the suggestion display, the display of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC as the predetermined display, and the display of the effect image showing the dotted line 57AKD as the distance identification display. Includes moving effects using displays. When the movement effect using these effect images is started, the effect image showing the police car 57AKC is displayed in the character display area AKB0. Thereafter, a moving state display is performed in which the display position of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC moves at a predetermined speed toward the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKA. In the moving state display of the effect display example 57AK103 and the effect display example 57AK104, for example, an effect image showing a dotted line 57AKD imitating the footprints of the character 57AKA is displayed between the character 57AKA and the police car 57AKC.

In the movement state display of the effect display example 57AK103 and the effect display example 57AK104, the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKA may be operated in a normal running mode. During the period in which the moving state display is performed, the effect image showing the character 57AKA displayed in any of the character display areas AKB1 to AKB7 is operated in a normal running mode without moving its display position. The normal running mode in the effect display example 57AK103 and the effect display example 57AK104 may be any display mode in which the character 57AKA normally runs, for example, by displaying an animation of the effect image showing the character 57AKA. The moving state display in which the character 57AKA is displayed in a display mode that is a normal running mode is a predetermined motion effect in which the display of a presentation image showing the character 57AKA is operated in a predetermined manner as a suggestion display. Instead of or in addition to the normal driving mode, the movement status display may be a display mode that performs an enlargement/contraction operation that repeats enlargement and reduction at a predetermined cycle, or a display mode that is an enlargement/contraction operation that repeats enlargement and reduction in a predetermined cycle, or a display mode that is a display mode that is an enlargement/contraction operation that repeats enlargement and reduction in a predetermined cycle, or a display mode that is a display mode that is a display mode that is a normal drive mode, or a display mode that is a display mode that is an expansion/contraction operation that repeats enlargement and reduction in a predetermined cycle, or a display mode that is a display mode that is a display mode that is a display mode that is a normal drive mode, or a display mode that is a display mode that is a display mode that is a normal drive mode. , a display mode in which the display is rocked at a predetermined period in a clockwise direction, a counterclockwise direction, or a predetermined direction that is a combination of some or all of these directions, and a color changing operation in which the display color changes at a predetermined period. The display mode, as well as some or all of the shape, pattern, and color of the performance image displayed, may be an operation display mode that can be changed at a predetermined period. The display mode of the movement status display may be partially or completely different from the display mode of the preparation notification display and the display mode of the change suggestion display, or may be a display mode that is at least partially common to the display mode of the preparation notification display and the display mode of the change suggestion display. Good too.

In the moving state display of the effect display example 57AK103 and the effect display example 57AK104, the display of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC may be operated in a movement notification mode. The movement notification mode of the police car 57AKC may be any display mode that allows the player or the like to recognize that the display position of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC is moving. The movement state display in which the police car 57AKC is displayed in a display mode that is a movement notification mode is a movement operation effect in which the display of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC is moved as a predetermined display. As the display position of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC moves, the display amount of the effect image showing the dotted line 57AKD is changed to become shorter. A display change operation in which the display amount of the effect image indicating the dotted line 57AKD is changed may also be included in the movement notification mode in the movement state display. By changing the display using the effect image showing the dotted line 57AKD, the display mode of the distance identification display can be changed in accordance with the movement of the display using the effect image showing the police car 57AKC in the moving effect.

In the preview suggestion effect of production display example 57AKA103 and production display example 57AK104, the distance from the display position of the production image showing the character 57AKA to the display position of the production image showing the police car 57AKC is the preview production that is the target of suggestion by the preview suggestion production. It is possible to indicate the remaining time until execution. For example, the distance L02 from the character 57AKA to the police car 57AKC in the performance display example 57AK104 is shorter than the distance L01 from the character 57AKA to the police car 57AKC in the performance display example 57AK103. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the remaining time until the preview performance to be suggested by the preview suggestion performance is executed is shorter in the case of the performance display example 57AK104 than in the case of the performance display example 57AK103.

An effect display example 57AK201 shown in FIG. 11-7(A) shows a case where a preparation notification display is performed using an effect image showing a character 57AKB. The preparation notification display of the performance display example 57AK201 may be any display mode that allows the player or the like to recognize that the execution of the advance notice suggestion performance using the character 57AKB is being prepared. The preparation notification display of production display example 57AK201 is performed in the character display area AKB0 set for suggestion preparation notification. In the preparation notification display of the effect display example 57AK201, the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKB serving as the suggestion display may be operated in the preparation notification mode. The preparation notification mode in the effect display example 57AK201 may be any display mode in which, for example, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is enlarged/reduced in a predetermined cycle.

The preparation notification mode in the effect display example 57AK201 is such that, for example, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed at a predetermined period in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, or a predetermined direction that is a combination of some or all of these directions. The display mode may be a swaying motion in which the screen oscillates. The preparation notification mode in the effect display example 57AK201 may be, for example, a display mode in which a display color changes at a predetermined period in a part or all of the effect image showing the character 57AKB. In addition, the preparation notification mode for displaying the effect image showing the character 57AKB may be an operation display mode in which part or all of the shape, pattern, and color of the character 57AKB shown by the display of the effect image can be changed at a predetermined period. good. In the preparation notification display, a part or all of the display mode may be different depending on whether the display target is the character 57AKA or 57AKB. The preparation notification display for displaying the character 57AKB in a preparation notification mode is a preparation action effect for causing the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKB to perform a preparation operation.

An effect display example 57AK202 shown in FIG. 11-7(B) shows a case where a change suggestion display is performed using an effect image showing a character 57AKB. The change suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK202 may be a special mode of display that allows the player or the like to recognize that the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKB is to be changed. In the change suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK202, the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKB serving as the suggestion display may be operated in a change suggestion mode. The change suggestion mode in the effect display example 57AK202 may be any display mode that is a change suggestion operation in which, for example, the display color of the effect image showing the character 57AKB changes and an effect image is added to the effect image showing the character 57AKB.

The display color that changes in the change suggestion mode in the effect display example 57AK202 may be a different display color from the display color that changes in the change suggestion mode in the effect display example 57AK102. The display color of the effect image added in the change suggestion mode in the effect display example 57AK202 may be a different display color from the display color of the effect image added in the change suggestion mode in the effect display example 57AK102. In addition, in the change suggestion display, a part or all of the display mode may be different depending on whether the display target is the character 57AKA or the character 57AKB. Further, in the change suggestion display, a part or all of the display may be in a common display mode regardless of whether the display target is the character 57AKA or the character 57AKB. The change suggestion display that displays the character 57AKB in a display mode that is a change suggestion mode becomes a specific action effect that causes the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKB to perform a specific action.

After the preparation notification display of the production display example 57AK201 is performed, for example, when execution of the preview suggestion production using the character 57AKB is started in response to the start of the variable display, the preparation performed in the character display area AKB0 is started. The notification display changes to a change suggestion display in the same character display area AKB0. Thereafter, the display position of the performance image showing the character 57AKB is changed to one of the character display areas AKB1 to AKB7, depending on the execution timing of the preview performance to be suggested by the preview suggestion performance. The effect in which the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKB is changed is included in the position change effect.

The effect display example 57AK203 shown in FIG. 11-7(C) and the effect display example 57AK204 shown in FIG. 11-7(D) show the case where the execution of the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKB is started. In response to the start of the variable display, a position change effect is executed for the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKB serving as the suggestion display, thereby starting the variable display of the decorative pattern accompanied by the preview effect that is the target of the suggestion. At this time, execution of a preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKB is started. The preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKB includes the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKB as the suggestion display, the display of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC as the predetermined display, and the display of the effect image showing the dotted line 57AKD as the distance identification display. Includes moving effects using displays. When the movement effect using these effect images is started, the effect image showing the police car 57AKC is displayed in the character display area AKB0. Thereafter, a moving state display is performed in which the display position of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC moves at a predetermined speed toward the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKB. In the moving state display of the effect display example 57AK203 and the effect display example 57AK204, for example, an effect image showing a dotted line 57AKD imitating the footprints of the character 57AKB is displayed between the character 57AKB and the police car 57AKC.

In the moving state display of the performance display example 57AK203 and the performance display example 57AK204, the display of the performance image showing the character 57AKB may be operated in a normal running mode. During the period in which the moving state display is performed, the effect image showing the character 57AKB displayed in any of the character display areas AKB1 to AKB7 is operated in a normal running mode without moving its display position. The normal running mode in the effect display example 57AK203 and the effect display example 57AK204 may be any display mode in which the character 57AKB normally runs, for example, by displaying an animation of the effect image showing the character 57AKB. The movement state display in which the character 57AKB is displayed in a display mode that is a normal running mode is a predetermined action effect in which the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKB is operated in a predetermined manner as a suggestion display.

In the moving state display of the effect display example 57AK203 and the effect display example 57AK204, the display of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC may be operated in a movement notification mode. The movement notification mode may be the same mode as the effect display example 57AK103 and the effect display example 57AK104, or may be partially or entirely different. The movement state display in which the police car 57AKC is displayed in a display mode that is a movement notification mode is a movement operation effect in which the display of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC is moved as a predetermined display. Also in this case, as the display position of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC moves, the display amount of the effect image showing the dotted line 57AKD is changed to become shorter. Also in the effect display example 57AK203 and the effect display example 57AK204, the distance identification display is changed according to the movement of the display of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC in the moving effect by the display change operation in which the display amount of the effect image showing the dotted line 57AKD is changed. The display mode of can be changed.

In the preview suggestion effect of production display example 57AK203 and production display example 57AK204, the distance from the display position of the production image showing the character 57AKB to the display position of the production image showing the police car 57AKC is the preview production that is the target of the suggestion by the preview suggestion production. It is possible to suggest the remaining time until execution. For example, the distance L02 from the character 57AKB to the police car 57AKC in the performance display example 57AK204 is shorter than the distance L01 from the character 57AKB to the police car 57AKC in the performance display example 57AK203. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the remaining time until the preview performance to be suggested by the preview suggestion performance is executed is shorter in the case of the performance display example 57AK204 than in the case of the performance display example 57AK203.

In the case of double display in which both characters 57AKA and 57AKB are displayed, when the preparation notification display is performed, characters 57AKA and 57AKB should be displayed vertically in the character display area AKB0 so that each can be recognized. Bye. Alternatively, the preparation notification display may be performed by arranging the character 57AKA and the character 57AKB in different character display areas. For example, the preparation notification display for the character 57AKA may be performed in the character display area AKB0, while the preparation notification display for the character 57AKB may be performed in the character display area AKB1. Thereafter, the advance notice suggestion performance may be started by the character 57AKA and the character 57AKB at the same time, or the advance notice suggestion display by the other character may be started while one character is kept on standby in the preparation notification display. Then, the advance notice suggestion performance by one of the characters that is kept on standby in the preparation notification display may be started while the other character is performing the advance notice suggestion performance, or the execution of the advance notice suggestion performance by the other character may be completed. After that, execution may begin. In the case of double display, the presentation mode of the presentation image showing the police car 57AKC and the presentation image showing the dotted line 57AKD may be a display form common to the character 57AKA and the character 57AKB. In the case of double display, the speed at which the display position of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC moves in the movement effect may be the same speed as the character 57AKA and the character 57AKB. In the case of double display, the display mode of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC and the effect image showing the dotted line 57AKD may be partially or completely different depending on the character 57AKA and the character 57AKB. Thereby, the player may be able to easily recognize the preview suggestion performance corresponding to the character 57AKA and the character 57AKB.

Performance display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113 shown in FIGS. 11-8(A) to 11-8(C) show cases in which an approach notification display is performed in a preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKA. The approach notification display of the effect display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113 may be any display mode that allows the player or the like to recognize that the police car 57AKC is approaching the character 57AKA. In the approach notification display of the effect display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113, the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKA may be operated in an approach notification mode. The approach notification mode in the effect display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113 may be any display mode in which the character 57AKA runs at full power, for example, by displaying an animation of the effect image showing the character 57AKA. The approach notification display in which the character 57AKA is displayed in a display mode that is an approach notification mode is a notification action performance in which the display of a performance image showing the character 57AKA is performed in a notification operation as a suggestion display. The notification operation based on the approach notification display is also referred to as an emphasis operation.

The approach notification display of the effect display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113 may include a speech notification display that uses the speech of the character 57AKA to notify that the police car 57AKC is approaching. The approach notification display of the performance display example 57AK111 includes a first stage speech notification display, and has a display mode including a character display of "Not yet!" corresponding to the distance L11 from the character 57AKA to the police car 57AKC. The approach notification display of the production display example 57AK112 includes a second-stage speech notification display, and has a display mode including the character display of "No!" corresponding to the distance L12 from the character 57AKA to the police car 57AKC. The approach notification display of the production display example 57AK113 includes a third stage speech notification display, and corresponds to the distance L13 from the character 57AKA to the police car 57AKC, and has a display mode including the character display of "Come!". In this way, in the speech notification displays of the effect display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113, it is sufficient that the display mode of the character display can be changed depending on the distance from the character 57AKA to the police car 57AKC. The distance L11 in the effect display example 57AK111 may have a length corresponding to, for example, three seconds before the police car 57AKC reaches the character 57AKA. The distance L12 in the effect display example 57AK112 may have a length corresponding to, for example, two seconds before the police car 57AKC reaches the character 57AKA. The distance L13 in the effect display example 57AK113 may have a length corresponding to, for example, one second before the police car 57AKC reaches the character 57AKA. Such an approach notification display accompanied by a speech notification display is included in the special distance performance that can be executed when the distance between the predetermined display and the suggestion display in the moving performance becomes a predetermined distance.

A performance display example 57AK114 shown in FIG. 11-8(D) shows a case where an arrival notification display is performed in the preview suggestion performance. The arrival notification display of the effect display example 57AK114 may be any display mode that allows the player or the like to recognize that the police car 57AKC has arrived at the character 57AKA. After the approach notification display of the effect display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113 is performed, the arrival notification display of the effect display example 57AK114 is performed, so that the special distance effect is executed, and then the effect image showing the character 57AKA, which becomes the suggestion display. The display mode can be changed.

A performance display example 57AK115 shown in FIG. 11-8 (E1) shows a case where a continuation suggestion display is performed in a preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKA. In the advance notice suggestion effect using the character 57AKA, a special change effect may be executed in which the display mode of the effect image showing the character 57AKA serving as the suggestion display is changed to a special mode. The special change effect that changes the display mode of the character 57AKA to a special mode is also a special operation effect that causes the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKA to perform a special operation. The continuation suggestion display of the production display example 57AK115 may be a special display mode that indicates in a way that the player or the like can recognize that the preview suggestion production using the character 57AKA will be continued. After the approach notification display of effect display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113 is performed, after the arrival notification display of effect display example 57AK114 is performed, the continuation suggestion display of effect display example 57AK115 is performed, thereby executing the special distance effect. After that, it is possible to change the display mode of the effect image showing the character 57AKA which becomes the suggestive display. After the continuation suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK115 is performed, the change suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK102 is performed, and then the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKA may be changed by the position change effect. In this case, the movement effect is executed again, and a moving state display is performed in which the display position of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC moves at a predetermined speed toward the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKA. Note that the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKA may not be changed after the continuation suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK115 is performed. Alternatively, before the approach notification display of effect display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113 or the arrival notification display of effect display example 57AK114 is performed, the change suggestion display of effect display example 57AK202 is performed following the continuation suggestion display of effect display example 57AK215. Alternatively, the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKA may be changed by the position change effect without the continuation suggestion display of effect display example 57AK215 or the change suggestion display of effect display example 57AK202 being performed. .

The continuation suggestion display can be used instead of or in addition to the special display mode, such as a display mode that repeats enlargement and contraction at a predetermined cycle, a display mode that repeats enlargement and contraction at a predetermined cycle, a display mode that displays images in the horizontal direction, vertical direction, and clockwise direction. A display mode in which the display is rocked at a predetermined period in a predetermined direction that is a rotational direction and a counterclockwise direction, or a predetermined direction that is a combination of some or all of these directions, and a display mode in which a display color is changed in a predetermined period. In addition, some or all of the shape, pattern, and color of the display of the effect image may be changed in a predetermined period. The display format of the continuation suggestion display may be partially or completely different from the display format of the preparation notification display, the display format of the change suggestion display, and the display format of the movement status display, or at least a portion thereof may be different from the display format of the preparation notification display, the display format of the change suggestion display, and the display format of the movement status display. A common display mode may be used.

A performance display example 57AK116 shown in FIG. 11-8 (E2) shows a case where a suggestion target is displayed in a preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKA. In the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKA, a specific change effect is executed to change the display mode of the effect image showing the character 57AKA serving as the suggestion display to a specific mode. The specific change effect that changes the display mode of the character 57AKA to a specific mode is also a suggestive action effect that causes the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKA to perform a suggestive motion. The suggestion target display of the effect display example 57AK116 is a display in a specific manner that allows the player etc. to recognize that the timing for executing the preview performance that is the target of the suggestion by the preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKA has been reached. Any aspect is acceptable. In this way, the specific change effect in the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKA changes the display mode of the effect image showing the character 57AKA, which is a suggestion display suggesting one of the preview effects, in accordance with the execution of the preview effect. Change in a specific manner. Further, the suggesting motion performance in the preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKA causes the display of a performance image showing the character 57AKA that suggests one of the preview performances to perform a suggestive motion in response to the execution of the preview performance. After the approach notification display of effect display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113 is performed, after the arrival notification display of effect display example 57AK114 is performed, the suggestion target display of effect display example 57AK116 is performed, thereby executing the special distance effect. After that, it is possible to change the display mode of the effect image showing the character 57AKA which becomes the suggestive display. A part or all of the display mode of the suggested target display may be different depending on the preview performance of the suggested target. For example, the type, display color, shape, and pattern of the effect image showing the contents of the treasure box, and some or all of these may be changed depending on the timing at which the suggestion target display is executed. Thereby, it may be possible to specify the suggested preview effect according to the display mode of the suggestion target display.

In place of or in addition to the specific display mode, the suggested display may include a display mode that repeats enlargement and contraction at a predetermined cycle, horizontal direction, up and down direction, clockwise direction, etc. A display mode in which the display is rocked at a predetermined period in a predetermined direction that is a rotational direction and a counterclockwise direction, or a predetermined direction that is a combination of some or all of these directions, and a display mode in which a display color is changed in a predetermined period. In addition, some or all of the shape, pattern, and color of the display of the effect image may be changed in a predetermined period. The display mode of the suggestion target display may be partially or completely different from the display mode of the preparation notification display, the display mode of the change suggestion display, the display mode of the movement status display, and the display mode of the continuation suggestion display. Alternatively, at least a portion may be a common display mode.

Performance display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213 shown in FIGS. 11-9(A) to 11-9(C) show cases in which an approach notification display is performed in a preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKB. The approach notification display of the effect display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213 may be any display form that allows the player or the like to recognize that the police car 57AKC is approaching the character 57AKB. In the approach notification display of the effect display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213, the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKB may be operated in an approach notification mode. The approach notification mode in the effect display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213 may be any display mode in which the character 57AKB runs at full power, for example, by displaying an animation of the effect image showing the character 57AKB. The approach notification display in which the character 57AKB is displayed in a display mode that is an approach notification mode is a notification action performance in which the display of a performance image showing the character 57AKB is performed in a notification operation as a suggestion display.

The approach notification display of the effect display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213 may include a speech notification display that uses the speech of the character 57AKB to notify that the police car 57AKC is approaching. The approach notification display of the performance display example 57AK211 includes a first-stage speech notification display, and has a display mode including the character display of "Oh!" corresponding to the distance L11 from the character 57AKB to the police car 57AKC. The approach notification display of the performance display example 57AK212 includes a second stage speech notification display, and has a display mode including a character display of "No!" corresponding to the distance L12 from the character 57AKB to the police car 57AKC. The approach notification display of the performance display example 57AK213 includes a third stage speech notification display, and corresponds to the distance L13 from the character 57AKB to the police car 57AKC, and has a display mode including the character display of "Wow!". In this manner, in the speech notification displays of the effect display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213, it is sufficient that the display mode of the character display can be changed depending on the distance from the character 57AKB to the police car 57AKC. The distance L11 in the effect display example 57AK211 may have a length corresponding to, for example, 3 seconds before the police car 57AKC reaches the character 57AKB. The distance L12 in the effect display example 57AK212 may have a length corresponding to, for example, two seconds before the police car 57AKC reaches the character 57AKB. The distance L13 in the effect display example 57AK213 may have a length corresponding to, for example, one second before the police car 57AKC reaches the character 57AKB. Such an approach notification display accompanied by a speech notification display is included in the special distance performance that can be executed when the distance between the predetermined display and the suggestion display in the moving performance becomes a predetermined distance.

The utterance notification display included in the approach notification display of the effect display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213 may have a different display form from the utterance notification display included in the approach notification display of the effect execution examples 57AK111 to 57AK113. For example, character images that notify different messages are displayed in the first stage speech notification display in the performance display example 57AK211 and the first stage speech notification display in the performance display example 57AK111. Character images that notify different messages are displayed in the second stage speech notification display in the performance execution example 57AK212 and the second stage speech notification display in the performance display example 57AK112. Character images that notify different messages are displayed in the third stage speech notification display in the performance execution example 57AK213 and the third stage speech notification display in the performance display example 57AK113. In addition, in the speech notification display, a part or all of the display mode may be different depending on whether the display target is the character 57AKA or the character 57AKB. Further, in the approach notification display, a part or all of the display mode may be a common display mode regardless of whether the display mode is the character 57AKA or the character 57AKB. For example, the approach notification mode in the approach notification display may be a full-out running mode by displaying an animation of a performance image, whether it is the character 57AKA or the character 57AKB.

A performance display example 57AK214 shown in FIG. 11-9(D) shows a case where an arrival notification display is performed in the preview performance display. The arrival notification display of the effect display example 57AK214 may be any display mode that allows the player or the like to recognize that the police car 57AKC has arrived at the character 57AKB. After the approach notification display of the effect display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213 is performed, the arrival notification display of the effect display example 57AK214 is performed, so that the special distance effect is executed, and then the effect image showing the character 57AKB, which becomes the suggestion display. The display mode can be changed.

A production display example 57AK215 shown in FIG. 11-9 (E1) shows a case where a continuation suggestion display is performed in a preview suggestion production using the character 57AKB. In the advance notice suggestion effect using the character 57AKB, a special change effect may be executed in which the display mode of the effect image showing the character 57AKB serving as the suggestion display is changed to a special mode. The special change performance that changes the display mode of the character 57AKB to a special mode is also a special operation performance that causes the display of the performance image showing the character 57AKB to perform a special operation. The continuation suggestion display of the production display example 57AK215 may be a special display mode that indicates in a way that the player or the like can recognize that the preview suggestion production using the character 57AKB will be continued. After the approach notification display of effect display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213 is performed, after the arrival notification display of effect display example 57AK214 is performed, the continuation suggestion display of effect display example 57AK215 is performed, thereby executing the special distance effect. After that, it is possible to change the display mode of the effect image showing the character 57AKB which becomes the suggestive display. After the continuation suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK215 is performed, the change suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK202 is performed, and then the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKB may be changed by the position change effect. In this case, the moving effect is executed again, and a moving state display is performed in which the display position of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC moves at a predetermined speed toward the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKB. Note that the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKB may not be changed after the continuation suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK215 is performed. Alternatively, before the approach notification display of effect display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213 or the arrival notification display of effect display example 57AK214 is performed, the change suggestion display of effect display example 57AK202 is performed following the continuation suggestion display of effect display example 57AK215. Alternatively, the display position of the effect image showing the character 57AKB may be changed by the position change effect without the continuation suggestion display of effect display example 57AK215 or the change suggestion display of effect display example 57AK202 being performed. .

A performance display example 57AK216 shown in FIG. 11-9 (E2) shows a case where a suggestion target is displayed in a preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKB. In the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKB, a specific change effect is executed to change the display mode of the effect image showing the character 57AKB serving as the suggestion display to a specific mode. The specific change effect that changes the display mode of the character 57AKB to a specific mode is also a suggestive action effect that causes the display of the effect image showing the character 57AKB to perform a suggestive operation. The suggestion target display of production display example 57AK216 is a display in a specific manner that allows the player etc. to recognize that the timing for executing the preview performance that is the target of suggestion by the preview suggestion performance using character 57AKB has been reached. Any aspect is acceptable. In this way, the specific change effect in the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKB changes the display mode of the effect image showing the character 57AKB, which is a suggestion display suggesting one of the preview effects, in accordance with the execution of the preview effect. change in a specific manner. Further, the suggesting motion performance in the preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKB causes the display of a performance image showing the character 57AKB that suggests any of the preview performances to perform a suggestive motion in response to the execution of the preview performance. After the approach notification display of effect display examples 57AK211 to 57AK213 is performed, after the arrival notification display of effect display example 57AK214 is performed, the suggestion target display of effect display example 57AK216 is performed, thereby executing the special distance effect. After that, it is possible to change the display mode of the effect image showing the character 57AKB which becomes the suggestive display. A part or all of the display mode of the suggested target display may be different depending on the preview performance of the suggested target. For example, the type, display color, shape, and pattern of the effect image showing the contents of the treasure box, and some or all of these may be changed depending on the timing at which the suggestion target display is executed. Thereby, it may be possible to specify the suggested preview effect according to the display mode of the suggestion target display.

In a preview suggestion performance that suggests one of the multiple preview performances, the timing at which a continuation suggestion display is performed due to a special change performance or special action performance, or the suggestion target display is performed due to a specific change performance or suggestion action performance. The timing at which the character image is displayed will be different among multiple timings, depending on which of the multiple character display areas the character image, which is a hint indicating the preview performance, is displayed at the corresponding display position. controlled. For example, when the character display areas AKB0 to AKB7 shown in FIG. 11-5(A) are set corresponding to the variable display effect combination pattern AKQ22 based on the variable pattern PC3-3, multiple character images are displayed. The timing at which the continuation suggestion display or the target suggestion display is performed differs depending on which of the character display areas AKB1 to AKB7 the character is displayed in. Note that the character display area AKB0 is a display position of a character image set for notification of suggestion preparation, and no continuous suggestion display or target suggestion display is performed at this display position.

When the display position of the effect image showing either the characters 57AKA or 57AKB is the character display area AKB1, the continuation suggestion display or suggestion target display is performed at timing 57AKT01 shown in FIG. 11-3. When the suggestion target is displayed at the timing 57AKT01 corresponding to the character display area AKB1, the first pseudo continuous variation can be suggested as a preview performance. When the display position of the effect image showing either the characters 57AKA or 57AKB is the character display area AKB2, the continuation suggestion display or the suggestion target display is performed at timing 57AKT02 shown in FIG. 11-3. When the suggestion target is displayed at timing 57AKT02 corresponding to the character display area AKB2, the second pseudo continuous variation can be suggested as a preview effect.

When the display position of the effect image showing either the characters 57AKA or 57AKB is the character display area AKB3, the suggestion target is displayed at the timing 57AKT03 shown in FIG. 11-3. Note that the continuation suggestion display in this embodiment can be performed when the display position of the character image is in either character display area AKB1 or AKB2, and can be performed when the display position of the character image is in any of character display areas AKB3 to AKB7. shall not be caused. On the other hand, the continuation suggestion display may be performed when the display position of the character image is in another character display area, such as character display areas AKB3 and AKB4, for example. When the suggestion target display is performed at the timing 57AKT03 corresponding to the character display area AKB3, it is possible to suggest a notice after the reach is established as a notice effect. Similarly, if the display position of the effect image showing either character 57AKA or 57AKB is in one of the character display areas AKB4 to AKB7, the display position will be handled within the timings 57AKT04 to 57AKT07 shown in FIG. 11-3. The suggested target is displayed at the timing when the target is displayed. For example, when a suggestion target display is performed at timing 57AKT04 corresponding to character display area AKB4, a reach development performance can be suggested as a preview performance. When the suggestion target display is performed at timing 57AKT05 corresponding to the character display area AKB5, a battle command performance can be suggested as a preview performance. When the suggestion target display is performed at the timing 57AKT06 corresponding to the character display area 57AKB6, a win/fail branch performance can be suggested as a preview performance. When the target suggestion display is performed at timing 57AKT07 corresponding to the character display area AKB7, it is possible to suggest the operation section performance at the time of success or failure as a preview performance.

After the continuation suggestion display is performed, a change suggestion display is performed, and if the display position of the character image serving as the suggestion display is changed by the position change effect, the character display area AKB1 to AKB7 is The display position of the character image is changed to the character display area at the third position, which is farther from the character display area AKB0, than the character display area at the second position, which is closer to the character display area AKB0. In addition, the distance from the character display area AKB0 to the display position of the character image is the length of the route along which the production image showing the police car 57AKC can be moved in the moving production, and if it is the same distance as the straight line distance from the character display area AKB0. The distance may be different from the straight line distance from the character display area 57AKB0. For example, in the case of character display areas AKB1 to AKB3 among the character display areas AKB1 to AKB7 shown in Figure 11-5(A), the distance from character display area AKB0 to the display position of the character image is the same as the straight line distance. In the case of the character display areas AKB4 to AKB7, the distance from the character display area AKB0 to the display position of the character image is different from the straight line distance. Note that the dotted line shown in FIG. 11-5(A) is a route along which the effect image showing the police car 57AKC can move in the movement effect.

After a special change effect that changes the character 57AKA displayed in the character display area AKB1 to a special mode is executed, a change suggestion display that displays the character 57AKA in a special mode is performed, and the position change effect changes the display position of the character 57AKA. When changed, the display position of the character 57AKA can be changed to any one of the character display areas 57AKB2 to 57AKB7 which is farther from the character AKB0 than the character display area 57AKB1. After a special change effect that changes the character 57AKA displayed in the character display area AKB2 to a special mode is executed, a change suggestion display that displays the character 57AKA in a special mode is performed, and the position change effect changes the display position of the character 57AKA. When changed, the display position of the character 57AKA can be changed to any one of the character display areas 57AKB3 to 57AKB7 which is farther from the character AKB0 than the character display area 57AKB2. Even when a position change effect is executed for the character 57AKB, the display position can be changed in the same way. In this way, the display position of the character image that is changed by the position change effect is that among the character display areas AKB1 to AKB7, the character display area that is the second position that is closer to the character display area AKB0 is the display position before the change. The character display area at the third position that is far from the character display area AKB0 becomes the changed display position.

The rate at which the continuation suggestion display or the special change effect is executed may be varied depending on the display mode of the speech notification display included in the approach notification display. In the speech notification display, the display color of the text display, the size of the text display, the content of the text display, the effect image added to the text display, any other display mode of the text display, or the sound output together with the text display. A continuation suggestion display or a special change effect may be executed at different rates depending on the light emission of the light emitting member, a combination of some or all of these, and the like. For example, when the display color of the text display is "red", the continuation suggestion display or the special change effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the display color of the text display is "black".

When changing the display position of the effect images showing the characters 57AKA and 57AKB, which are suggested by the position change effect, the characters 57AKA and 57AKB are changed at a speed different from the speed at which the display position of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC is moved in the moving effect. What is necessary is to move the display position of the effect image showing the effect. For example, when changing the display position of the effect images showing the characters 57AKA and 57AKB, the display position may be changed at a speed that allows movement to any of the character display areas AKB1 to AKB7 within a period of one second. On the other hand, when moving the display position of the effect image showing the police car 57AKC, it is possible to move from the character display area AKB0 to the character display area AKB1 in a period of about 10 seconds, for example, and thereafter the character can be moved at the same moving speed. The display position may be moved between display areas AKB1 to AKB7.

FIG. 11-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-10, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a starting opening winning command has been received (step 57AKS01). The starting opening winning command includes a starting opening winning designation command, a pending storage number notification command, and a winning determination result command. In step 57AKS01, for example, the starting opening winning designation command, winning judgment result command, and pending storage number notification command are newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer provided in the RAM 122. By checking whether there is a command or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a command is received at the time of starting winning.

If no command is received (step 57 AKS01; No), the prefetch notice setting process ends. On the other hand, if a command has been received (step 57AKS01; Yes), the content of the notification based on the received command is specified (step 57AKS02). For example, the winning determination result is specified as the notification content by the winning determination result command. Then, the advance notice suggestion display is determined (step 57AKS03). Predetermining the advance notice suggestion display means determining whether or not to execute the notice suggestion display by the notice suggestion performance before the start of the variable display in which the notice performance that is the target of the suggestion by the advance notice suggestion performance is executed. It is. In step 57AKS03, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview suggestion display when the starting opening winning command is received, so it is possible to determine the preview suggestion display before the start of the variable display in which the preview effect is executed. can.

Thereafter, the advance notice suggestion preparation flag is set (step 57AKS04). The advance notice suggestion preparation flag only needs to be able to specify the state corresponding to OFF or ON based on the flag data stored in association with the reservation number in the reservation related data storage section provided in the RAM 122. The hold-related data storage unit is capable of storing various data such as data indicating winning determination results and data indicating a hold display image, in addition to flag data indicating the state of the advance notice suggestion preparation flag, in association with the hold number. Good to have. For example, when a advance decision is made to execute a notice suggestion display in step 57AKS03, the notice suggestion preparation flag of the pending number corresponding to the current starting winning is set to an on state. On the other hand, when a advance decision is made not to execute the preview suggestion display in step 57AKS03, the preview suggestion preparation flag of the pending number corresponding to the current starting winning is turned off. Note that the advance notice suggestion preparation flag may be in an off state as a default state by initial setting.

When the preview suggestion preparation flag is set in this way, the pending display at the time of starting winning is updated (step 57AKS05), and then the pre-read preview setting process is ended. If the first pending memory number increases by 1 due to the game ball passing through the first starting prize opening, the first pending display is increased by 1 by adding a new first pending display in step 57AKS05. Bye. If the second pending memory number increases by 1 due to the game ball passing through the second starting prize opening, the second pending display is increased by 1 by adding a new second pending display in step 57AKS05. Bye.

FIG. 11-11 shows a predetermined example 57AKE1 of advance notice suggestion display. In step 57AKS03 of the advance preview setting process, whether or not to display a preview suggestion is determined, for example, at a rate according to the winning determination result. Incidentally, if the hold number corresponding to the current starting winning is "1", it may be determined not to execute the preview suggestion display regardless of the winning determination result. If the flag data stored in the reservation-related data storage unit includes data indicating that the preview suggestion preparation flag is on, the preview suggestion display will not be executed regardless of the winning determination result. You may decide.

For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for advance notice suggestion determination and referring to the advance notice suggestion advance determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, a notice indicating whether or not to display advance notice suggestion is displayed. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not to display a suggestion. In the predetermined example 57AKE1 of advance notice suggestion display, either "no suggestion", which does not execute a notice suggestion display, or "suggestion", which executes a notice suggestion display, is determined. For example, when the winning determination result is "super reach confirmed when losing", the determination ratio of "no suggestion" and the determination ratio of "suggestion" are both 50/100. When the winning determination result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "no suggestion" is 30/100, and the determination ratio of "suggestion" is 70/100. In other cases, since the determination ratio of "no suggestion" is 100/100, it is determined not to perform the preview suggestion display.

In this way, when the winning judgment result is a "jackpot", the preview suggestion display is executed more than when the winning judgment result is other than a "jackpot" including "super reach confirmed when losing". It would be better if the percentage of "suggestions" increases. By making it easier for the preview suggestion display to be executed when the judgment result at the time of winning is a "jackpot", if the notice suggestion display is executed, the variable display result will be more likely to be "jackpot" than when the preview suggestion display is not executed. ”, and the rate of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. Note that whether or not the preview suggestion display is executed may be determined regardless of the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the winning determination result is "super reach confirmed when losing", it may be determined whether or not to display a preview suggestion based on the same ratio as when the winning determination result is "jackpot".

FIGS. 11-12 are flowcharts showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 11-12, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol etc. that will be the final decorative symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (step 57AKS11). Thereafter, the operation section performance is determined (step 57AKS12). The operation section presentation may be determined in the same manner as in the case of the characteristic sections 48AK to 50AK.

When the operation section performance is determined in step 57AKS12, a notice after the reach is established is determined (step 57AKS13). Furthermore, by executing the advance notice suggestion setting process (step 57AKS14), the advance notice suggestion effect is set to be executable. Subsequently, the production control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step 57AKS15). Thereafter, for example, an initial value of a performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (performance control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step 57AKS16). Furthermore, variations in decorative patterns and the like are started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 57AKS17). After setting the start of variation, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step 57 AKS18). Finally, after updating the value of the production process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step 57AKS19), the variable display start setting process is ended.

In the variable display effect processing that can be executed in step S172 of FIG. 9, processing for controlling effects by various effect devices is executed using the effect control pattern determined in step 57AKS15. Thereby, while the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of preview effects at a plurality of timings. Moreover, a preview suggestion performance that suggests any of the multiple types of preview performances can be executed.

FIG. 11-13 shows a determination example 57AKE11 of advance notice after reach is established. In step 57 AKS13 of the variable display start setting process, it is determined whether or not to execute a notice after the reach is achieved, and the type of notice to be executed. The execution or non-execution of the notice after reaching the reach and the type of notice are determined, for example, by referring to a notice determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, based on numerical data indicating a random number for determining the notice performance. All you have to do is make it so. In step 57, AKS13 determines the notification after a reach is established, either "No execution", which does not execute the notification after the reach is established, or "background display", "group display", or "movable body movement", which executes the notification after the reach is established. Determined by

Among the preview effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and become a preview after reach is established, for example, a background display notice corresponding to the notice type of "background display", a group display notice corresponding to the notice type of "group display", etc. , it suffices if the movable body movement notice corresponding to the notice type of "movable body movement" is included. The background display preview changes the display mode of the background image on the screen of the image display device 5 to a specific mode different from the normal mode. The background display notice includes the type of background image, color, pattern, display timing, display period, number of display updates, display update speed, a combination of some or all of these, and any other presentation mode by displaying the background image. Depending on the situation, the jackpot reliability, which is the rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled, may be executed differently. In the group display preview, an effect display is performed in which a group of effect images showing a large number of identical or similar characters pass on the screen of the image display device 5. The group display notice includes the type of characters, number of characters displayed, size, color, pattern, display position, display timing, display period, passing speed, or a combination of some or all of these, and other presentation images showing the characters. The jackpot reliability may be varied depending on an arbitrary performance mode displayed. In the movable body movement preview, an effect including the movement of the movable body 32 is executed. The movable object notice may be based on the movement distance of the movable body 32, the movement speed, the number of movements, the direction of movement, the number of movement targets, a combination of some or all of these, or any other presentation mode by the movement of the movable body 32. Therefore, the jackpot reliability may be different.

In the determination example 57AKE11 shown in FIG. 11-13, the determination ratio of the preview type, including execution or non-execution, differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot." In decision example 57 AKE11, when the variable display result is "lose", the decision ratio of "no execution", which does not execute the notice after the reach is established, is the highest. Further, in this case, the determination ratio of "background display" is 30/100, the determination ratio of "group display" is 20/100, and the determination ratio of "movable body motion" is 10/100. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "no execution", which does not execute the notice after the reach is established, is the lowest. Further, in this case, the determination ratio of "background display" is 20/100, the determination ratio of "group display" is 30/100, and the determination ratio of "movable body motion" is 40/100. As a result, when the notice is executed after the reach is established, the jackpot reliability becomes higher than when it is not executed. Furthermore, the jackpot reliability is higher when the group display preview is executed than when the background display preview is executed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher when the movable body movement preview is executed than when the group display preview is executed.

FIG. 11-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 57AKS14 of FIG. 11-12 as the advance notice suggestion setting process. In the advance notice suggestion setting process shown in FIG. 11-14, it is determined whether advance notice suggestion preparation is in progress (step 57AKS31). For example, if a preparation notification display using an effect image showing either the characters 57AKA or 57AKB is being performed in the character display area AKB0, it may be determined that a notice suggestion is being prepared.

If the advance notice suggestion preparation is not in progress (step 57AKS31; No), it is determined whether the advance notice suggestion preparation flag is on (step 57AKS32). In step 57AKS32, if flag data in which the advance notice suggestion preparation flag is set to the on state is stored in the suspension-related data storage section, it may be determined that the advance notice suggestion preparation flag is on. If the advance notice suggestion preparation flag is on (step 57AKS32; Yes), the start setting for advance notice suggestion preparation is performed (step 57AKS33). In step 57AKS33, in the character display area AKB0, either one of a preparation notification display using an effect image showing the character 57AKA of the effect display example 57AK101, or a preparation notification display using an effect image showing the character 57AKB of the effect display example 57AK201, or It would be good if it were possible to control the display to start both.

If the advance notice suggestion preparation flag is off (step 57AKS32; No), a last-minute decision to display advance notice suggestion is made (step 57AKS34). The last-minute decision to display a preview suggestion is to decide whether or not to execute a preview suggestion display based on a preview suggestion performance, in response to the start of a variable display in which the preview performance that is the target of the suggestion by the preview suggestion performance is executed. That's true. In step 57 AKS34, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview suggestion effect when the variable display start time command is received, so the preview suggestion display is determined in response to the start of the variable display in which the preview effect is executed. I can do it. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for last-minute notice suggestion decision updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and based on the variable display content, a last-minute notice decision table stored and prepared in advance in ROM 121 is referred to. Depending on the situation, the presence or absence of the advance notice suggestion display may be determined to be ``suggestion'', which executes the advance notice suggestion display, or ``no suggestion'', which does not execute the advance notice suggestion display. Based on the determination made in step 57AKS34, it is determined whether there is a "suggestion" to execute a preview suggestion display (step 57AKS35). In the case of "no suggestion" in which the preview suggestion display is not executed (step 57 AKS35; No), the preview suggestion setting process is ended.

If the advance notice suggestion setting process is started and the advance notice suggestion is being prepared (step 57AKS31; Yes), it is determined whether or not the target change has started (step 57AKS36). In step 57AKS36, based on the stored data in the suspension-related data storage section, it may be determined that the target variation has started if the preview effect that is the target of the suggestion by the preview suggestion effect is the start of a variable display to be executed. . For example, if the suspension-related data storage unit stores flag data indicating that the advance notice suggestion preparation flag is in the on state, corresponding to the suspension number “1”, the target change may start.

In the case where "suggestion exists" due to the last-minute decision to display the preview suggestion (Step 57 AKS35; Yes), or when the target change starts during the preparation of the preview suggestion (Step 57 AKS36; Yes), the effect combination pattern during the variable display is specified. (Step 57AKS37). In step 57AKS37, in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-12, the variable display when the operation part effect is not executed according to the effect content determined until the advance notice suggestion setting process is executed in step 57AKS14. It is only necessary to specify which pattern is the medium performance combination patterns AKP00 to AKP10 and the variable display performance combination patterns AKQ01 to AKQ22 when the operation section performance is executed.

After specifying the variable display effect combination pattern, the suggested effect is determined (step 57AKS38). The suggestion target performance is a preview performance that is the target of suggestion by the preview suggestion performance. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a suggestion target performance that is updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and a variable display result is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on a "loss" or "jackpot". By referring to the suggestion target performance determination table, etc., the suggestion target performance can be determined as the following: pseudo-coupled variation in pseudo-coupling performance, notice after reaching is established, reach development performance, battle command performance, win/fail branch performance, and operation part performance during win/fail incitement. It is only necessary to decide on one of the preview effects. Note that the preview performances that can be determined as the suggestion target performance may be set to include different preview performances according to the variable display performance combination pattern specified in step 57AKS37. Furthermore, the character to be used is determined (step 57AKS39). In step 57AKS39, either a single display in which either one of the characters 57AKA or 57AKB is displayed or a double display in which both characters 57AKA or 57AKB are displayed may be determined. For example, extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a character to be used, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, etc., and referring to a character determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 in accordance with the suggested effect. The character to be used can be determined by

Following the determination of the character to be used, the continuation suggestion display is determined (step 57 AKS40), and the advance notice suggestion setting process is ended. In step 57AKS40, it is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not to display a continuation suggestion and the timing of execution. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the continuation suggestion display updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the variable display result is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on "loss" or "jackpot". By referring to the continuation suggestion display determination table, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the continuation suggestion display as the presence or absence of the continuation suggestion display. In step 57 AKS40, "No Execution" is selected, in which the continuation suggestion display is not executed, "Pseudo Continuation (1st temporary stop)", "Pseudo Continuation (temporary stop 2nd time)", and "Pseudo Continuation (temporary stop)" are executed when the continuation suggestion display is executed. 1st temporary stop)+pseudo-connection (2nd temporary stop). "Pseudo connection (1st temporary stop)" is performed at timing 57AKT01 corresponding to character display area AKB1 when character display area AKB1 set to suggest the first pseudo connection change is the display position of the character image. This is a case where a continuation suggestion display is executed. "Pseudo-link (temporary stop second time)" is executed at timing 57AKT02 corresponding to character display area AKB2 when character display area AKB2 set to suggest the second pseudo-link change is the display position of the character image. This is a case where a continuation suggestion display is executed. "Pseudo-continuation (1st temporary stop) + pseudo-continuation (2nd temporary stop)" is a continuation suggestion display at both timing 57AKT01 corresponding to character display area AKB1 and timing 57AKT02 corresponding to character display area AKB2. This is a case of execution. Note that when executing the continuation suggestion display, the continuation suggestion display may be executed at timings different from timings AKT01 and AKT02, such as timing 57AKT03 corresponding to character display area AKB3 and timing 57AKT04 corresponding to character display area AKB4. It may be possible to determine.

FIGS. 11-15 show examples of various decisions made by the advance notice suggestion setting process. FIG. 11-15(A) shows an example 57AKE21 of determining the advance notice suggestion display in step 57AKS34 of the advance notice suggestion setting process. FIG. 11-15(B) shows an example 57AKE22 of the suggestion target effect determined by step 57AKS38 of the preview suggestion setting process. FIG. 11-15(C) shows an example 57AKE23 of determining the character to be used in step 57AKS39 of the advance notice suggestion setting process. FIG. 11-15(D) shows an example 57AKE24 of determining the continuation suggestion display in step 57AKS40 of the advance notice suggestion setting process.

In determination example 57AKE21 shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the variable display content is determined by the ratio according to "non-reach (lose)", "normal reach (lose)", "super reach (lose)", and "jackpot". The presence or absence of a notice suggestion display is determined. The variable display content can be specified based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or the display result of the variable display indicated by the variable display result notification command. If the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change to the reach mode, but the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display becomes a “lose”. When the variable display content is "Normal Reach (Lose)", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern changes to the reach mode, the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed. As a result, the display result of the variable display becomes “lost”. If the variable display content is "Super Reach (Lose)", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern changes to the reach mode, the reach effect of Super Reach is executed, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the reach loss combination stops. will be displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be "Loss". When the variable display content is "Jackpot", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern changes to the reach mode, the reach effect of normal reach or super reach is executed, and then the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the display result of the variable display becomes a “jackpot”.

In decision example 57 AKE21, for example, if the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal reach (loss)", the decision ratio of "no suggestion" is 100/100, and the preview suggestion display is always executed. It is determined that there is no suggestion. When the variable display content is "Jackpot" than when the variable display content is "Super Reach (Lose)", the decision rate of "Suggestions" is higher, and the decision rate of "Suggestions" is higher than when the variable display content is "Super Reach (Lose)". It is likely that the decision will be made as “Suggestions.” Therefore, when the preview suggestion display is executed by the preview suggestion performance, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled is higher than when the preview suggestion display is not executed. Note that the determination ratio is not limited to the determination ratio in determination example 57AKE21, and may be any determination ratio that increases the reliability of the jackpot by executing the advance notice suggestion performance. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may be a determination ratio that does not change whether or not the preview suggestion effect is executed. Even if the variable display content is "Non-Reach (Loss)" or "Normal Reach (Lose)," for example, if a pseudo-continuation variation is executed by a pseudo-continuation effect, a "Suggested" display is displayed at a predetermined rate. ” may be determined.

In the determination example 57AKE22 shown in FIG. 11-15(B), the suggestion target performance is determined based on the proportion of the variable display result being a "loss" or "jackpot". In decision example 57 AKE22, if the variable display result is "lost", the preview performance that is executed at an earlier timing becomes the suggested target performance at a higher rate than the preview performance that is executed at a later timing. It is determined. On the other hand, in decision example 57AKE22, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the preview performance executed at a later timing has a higher rate than the preview performance executed at an earlier timing. It is decided to be a suggested performance. Therefore, among multiple preview performances that can be executed at different timings during execution of a variable display, the preview performance that is executed at an earlier timing is executed at a later timing than when a suggestion target display is performed as a suggestion target. In the case where a suggestion target display is performed using a preview performance as a suggestion target, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state becomes higher. Note that the determination ratio is not limited to the determination ratio in determination example 57AKE22, and may be any determination ratio that increases the jackpot reliability by executing the preview performance that is the target of suggestion at a late timing.

If the suggestion target performance is determined to be the operation part performance at the time of success or failure, a preview suggestion performance is executed, and after the suggestion target display is performed, the vibration pattern included in the operation part performance pattern is set as a predetermined vibration performance. By driving the vibration motor 131, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated. Further, as a light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be caused to emit light in a color and a light emission period according to the operation section effect pattern.

Further, when the suggestion target performance is determined to be a preview after the reach is established, the operation section performance when the reach is established may be included in the preview performance to be suggested. For example, after it is determined in step 57AKS12 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. If it is determined to be a notice, a notice suggesting effect that suggests a notice after a reach is established can be executed to suggest an operation section effect when a reach is established.

When the suggestion target performance is determined to be a reach development performance, the operation section performance at the time of reach development may be included in the preview performance to be suggested. For example, after it is determined in step 57 AKS12 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. If it is determined to be , it is possible to suggest the operation unit performance when the reach is developed by executing a preview suggestion performance that suggests the reach development performance.

In determination example 57AKE23 shown in FIG. 11-15(C), the character to be used is determined according to the ratio according to the suggestion target performance. In determination example 57AKE23, when the suggested performance is a preview performance that will be executed at an earlier timing, the character 57AKA is used at a higher rate than when the suggested performance is a preview performance that will be executed at a later timing. is determined as. On the other hand, in decision example 57AKE23, when the suggestion target performance is a preview performance to be executed at a later timing than when the suggestion target performance is a preview performance to be executed at a later timing, the character It was decided to use 57AKB or double display. Therefore, the preview suggestion presentation in which only the presentation image showing the character 57AKB is displayed as the character to be used, or the presentation image showing the character 57AKA and the character 57AKB, is better than the presentation suggestion presentation in which only the presentation image showing the character 57AKA is displayed as the character to be used. In the double-display advance notice suggestion performance in which a performance image indicating ``is displayed as the character to be used, the variable display result becomes ``jackpot'' and the rate of control to the jackpot game state is higher. Note that the determination ratio is not limited to the determination example 57AKE22, and may be any determination ratio that increases the jackpot reliability when the character 57AKB is the used character or when double display is performed.

The character to be used may be used when it is determined to execute a preview suggestion display in step 57AKS03 of the prefetched notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-10, or in step 57AKS33 of the preview suggestion setting process shown in FIG. 11-14. This may be determined when setting the start of advance notice suggestion preparation. In these cases, it is only necessary that a character to be used for the preparation suggestion display be determined based on, for example, the winning determination result, and that the preview suggestion effect can be executed using that character.

In the determination example 57AKE24 shown in FIG. 11-15(D), the presence or absence of a continuation suggestion display and the timing of execution are determined depending on the ratio of the variable display result to a "loss" or "jackpot". In decision example 57 AKE24, when the variable display result is "lost", the decision ratio of "no execution", which does not execute the continuation suggestion display, is high. On the other hand, in decision example 57 AKE24, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the decision ratio of "no execution", which does not execute the continuation suggestion display, is low. Therefore, when the continuation suggestion display is executed, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled is higher than when the continuation suggestion display is not executed. Note that the display mode of the utterance notification display included in the approach notification display may be determined at a different rate depending on whether the continuation suggestion display is executed or not.

After the continuation suggestion display is performed, a change suggestion display is performed, and then the display position of the character image is changed by a position change effect. For example, in a preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKA, after the continuation suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK115 is performed, the change suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK102 is performed, and then the effect image showing the character 57AKA by the position change effect. The display position of can be changed. In the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKB, after the continuation suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK215 is performed, the change suggestion display of the effect display example 57AK202 is performed, and then the effect image indicating the character 57AKB is displayed by the position change effect. The position can be changed.

When the display position of the effect images showing the characters 57AKA and 57AKB is changed by the position change effect, the character display area is set to the second position of the character display areas AKB1 to AKB7, which is closer to the character display area AKB0. is the display position before the change, and the character display area at the third position, which is the farthest distance from the character display area AKB0, is the display position after the change. Therefore, the position change effect is executed better when the display position of the effect image showing the characters 57AKA and 57AKB is changed from the character display area at the second position to the character display area at the third position due to the position change effect. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled is higher than when the display position of the performance image showing the characters 57AKA and 57AKB is not changed. Furthermore, it is better to perform a special action performance that causes the display of the performance images showing the characters 57AKA and 57AKB to perform a special action, and then to perform a suggested action performance, in which case the suggestion action performance is executed without executing the special action performance. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in decision example 57AKE24 shown in FIG. 11-15(D), if the variable display result is "lost", the number of times the continuation suggestion display is executed is "pseudo-continuation (first temporary stop)" or The decision ratio of "pseudo series (temporary stop 2nd time)" is higher than the decision ratio of "pseudo series (temporary stop 1st time) + pseudo series (temporary stop 2nd time)" where the number of executions of the continuation suggestion effect is 2 times. expensive. On the other hand, in decision example 57AKE24, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of executions of the continuation suggestion display is 1, such as "pseudo series (temporary stop 1st time)" or "pseudo series (temporary stop 2nd time)". The determination ratio of "pseudo series (first temporary stop) + pseudo series (second temporary stop)" in which the number of executions of the continuation suggestion performance is two is higher than the determination ratio of "first time temporary stop". Therefore, when the number of executions of the continuation suggestion performance is large, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled is higher than when the number of executions of the continuation suggestion production is small. In this way, by repeatedly executing the continuation suggestion performance, it is possible to increase the reliability of the jackpot, attracting the player's attention to the continuation suggestion performance, and improving the interest in the game.

When the continuation suggestion effect is repeatedly executed, the position change effect can also be executed repeatedly, and the display position of the character image can be repeatedly changed in the character display areas AKB1 to AKB7. As a result, when the distance from the display of the police car 57AKC, which is the predetermined display, to the display of the characters 57AKA, 57AKB, which are the suggestion display, is repeatedly extended, the reliability of the jackpot is increased, and the reliability of the jackpot is increased, It is possible to attract the attention of the players and improve their interest in the game.

In the decision example 57AKE23 shown in FIG. 11-15(C), if it is decided to display double display that displays both characters 57AKA and 57AKB, in the decision example 57AKE24 shown in FIG. 11-15(D), the continuation suggestion display is The presence or absence and timing of the characters 57AKA and 57AKB may be determined in common to the characters 57AKA and 57AKB, or may be determined differently depending on the characters 57AKA and 57AKB. For example, the approach notification display and the continuation suggestion display may be performed at the same timing for both characters 57AKA and 57AKB, or may be performed at separate timings for each of the characters 57AKA and 57AKB. There may be cases where a suggestion target display is performed after a continuation suggestion display is performed for one character, and a suggestion target display is performed without a continuation suggestion display corresponding to the other character. For example, for each character 57AKA and 57AKB, the presence or absence and timing of a continuation suggestion display as shown in determination example 57AKE24 is determined, and one of characters 57AKA and 57AKB is determined to be "no execution", and the other is determined to be other than "no execution". Good too. When the approach notification display and the continuation suggestion display are performed at the same timing, the display positions of the characters 57AKA and 57AKB may be changed to change the approach notification mode or the special mode. When the approach notification display or the continuation suggestion display is performed, the output sounds may be made different depending on the characters 57AKA and 57AKB. The approach notification mode and special mode may be made different depending on the characters 57AKA and 57AKB. In addition, when an approach notification display or a continuation suggestion display is performed, an arbitrary presentation mode may be made different depending on a plurality of character images. Alternatively, when an approach notification display or a continuation suggestion display is performed, part or all of the presentation modes corresponding to a plurality of character images may be made into a common presentation mode.

In the advance notice suggestion setting process shown in FIGS. 11-14, when determining the character to be used in step 57AKS39, it is possible to determine whether or not to display double display in which both characters 57AKA and 57AKB are displayed. On the other hand, after the variable display effect combination pattern is specified in step 57AKS37 and before the suggested effect is determined in step 57AKS38, it may be determined whether or not to perform double display. If it is determined that "no double display" is selected, the suggested effect is determined in step 57AKS38, and then the character to be used is determined to be either character 57AKA or 57AKB in step 57AKS39, and step 57AKS40 The continuation suggestion display may be determined based on the following. If it is determined that "double display" is to be executed, the suggestion target performance is determined in step 57AKS38, and then step 57AKS39 is omitted and the continuous suggestion display is determined in step 57AKS40. In this case, when determining the suggestion target performance in step 57AKS38, individual suggestion target performances may be determined for each of the characters 57AKA and 57AKB. For example, a suggestion target performance such as determination example 57AKE22 is determined for each character 57AKA and 57AKB, and the suggestion target performance in the preview suggestion performance by character 57AKA and the suggestion target performance in the preview suggestion performance by character 57AKB become different preview performances. There may be cases. In this case, the suggestion target performance in the preview suggestion performance by character 57AKB has a higher percentage than the suggestion target performance in the preview suggestion performance by character 57AKA, which is executed at a later timing among multiple timings. It may be determined by

FIGS. 11-16 to 11-19 show examples of performance execution including advance notice suggestion performance. In the production execution examples shown in Figures 11-16 and 11-17, in the case of a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuation variation is performed once in a pseudo-continuation production and then a reach mode occurs, the suggested production is determined to be a notice after a reach is established. The character to be used is determined to be the character 57AKA, and it is determined that the continuation suggestion display is to be executed in response to the first pseudo continuous variation.

In the performance execution example 57AKG01 shown in FIG. 11-16(A), a preparation notification display is performed by the character 57AKA when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished. For example, in step 57AKS03 of the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-10, based on the predetermined "suggestion" to execute the notice suggestion display, the advance notice suggestion preparation flag is turned on in step 57AKS04. If set, when the advance notice suggestion preparation flag is determined to be on in step 57AKS32 of the advance notice suggestion setting process shown in FIG. 11-14, the start setting for advance notice suggestion preparation is performed in step 57AKS33. . Thereby, the preparation notification display can be started as a pre-reading effect before the start of the variable display accompanied by the preview effect to be suggested by the preview suggestion effect. In addition, based on the last-minute determination of "with suggestion" to execute the preview suggestion display in step 57AKS34 of the notice suggestion setting process, the timing of the start of the variable display accompanied by the notice effect that is the target of the suggestion by the notice suggestion effect, etc. During execution, a preparation notification effect may be started as the effect. When the preparation notification display is performed, the effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed in the preparation notification mode in the character display area AKB0. By the preparation notification display of the production execution example 57AKG01, a preparation motion production is executed in which the display of the character 57AKA is caused to make a preparation motion in the first position. In the production execution example 57AKG02 shown in FIG. 11-16(B), a change suggestion display by the character 57AKA is performed when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed in a change suggestion mode in the character display area AKB0. By displaying the change suggestion in the production execution example 57AKG02, a specific action production is executed in which the display of the character 57AKA is caused to perform a specific movement at the first position. Note that the change suggestion display may be performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of variable display of decorative symbols.

In the performance execution example 57AKG03 shown in FIG. 11-16(C), the advance notice suggestion performance using the character 57AKA is started after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. After the change suggestion display of the production execution example 57AKG02 is performed, the display position of the character 57AKA is changed to the character display area AKB1, and a production image showing the police car 57AKC is displayed in the character display area AKB0, and the character AKA is displayed from the police car 57AKC. In the meantime, a presentation image showing the dotted line 57AKD is displayed, thereby starting the preview suggestion presentation using the character 57AKA. In the production execution example 57AKG03, the distance from the police car 57AKC to the character AKA is longer than the distance L11 shown in FIG. 11-8(A), so the character 57AKA is displayed in the normal driving mode in the character display area AKB1. The moving status is displayed. Based on the movement state display of the performance execution example 57AKG03, a movement performance is executed in which the display of the character 57AKA is operated in a predetermined manner at the second position, and the display position of the police car 57AKC is moved toward the display position of the character 57AKA.

In the performance execution example 57AKG04 shown in FIG. 11-16(D), an approach notification display by the character 57AKA is performed during a specific period after the movement state display of the performance execution example 57AKG03 is performed. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed in the character display area AKB1 in a full-power running mode. Furthermore, in response to the fact that the distance from the police car 57AKC to the character 57AKA is the distance L11 shown in FIG. 11-8(A), the first stage speech notification display by the character 57AKA is performed. In the performance execution example 57AKG05 shown in FIG. 11-16(E), a second stage speech notification display by the character 57AKA is performed following the performance execution example 57AKG04. Also in this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed in the character display area AKB1 in a full-power running mode. The second stage speech notification display by the character 57AKA is performed in response to the fact that the distance from the police car 57AKC to the character 57AKA is the distance L12 shown in FIG. 11-8(B). In the performance execution example 57AKG06 shown in FIG. 11-16(F), the third stage speech notification display by the character 57AKA is performed after the performance execution example 57AKG05. Also in this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed in the character display area AKB1 in a full-power running mode. The third stage speech notification display by the character 57AKA is performed in response to the fact that the distance from the police car 57AKC to the character 57AKA is the distance L13 shown in FIG. 11-8(C).

In the performance execution example 57AKG07 shown in FIG. 11-16(G), the arrival notification display is performed after the performance execution example 57AKG06. The display mode of the character 57AKA and the police car 57AKC in the approach notification display of the performance execution examples 57AKG04 to 57AKG06 can be changed depending on the arrival notification display. In the performance execution example 57AKG08 shown in FIG. 11-16(H), a continuation suggestion display by the character 57AKA is performed at timing 57AKT01. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed in a special manner in the character display area AKB1. By the continuation suggestion display of the production execution example 57AKG08, a special motion production is executed in which the display of the character 57AKA is caused to perform a special motion in the second position.

In the effect execution example 57AKG09 shown in FIG. 11-17(A), the variable display is temporarily stopped before the start of the first pseudo continuous variation, following the effect execution example 57AKG08. In production execution example 57AKG09, the decorative pattern that becomes the pseudo continuous pattern is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, thereby ending the first variation and making it possible to start the first pseudo continuous variation. With performance execution example 57AKG09 following performance execution example 57AKG08, after the continuation suggestion display is performed in the advance notice suggestion performance, the variable display can be temporarily stopped before the start of the first pseudo continuous variation. In the performance execution example 57AKG10 shown in FIG. 11-17(B), a change suggestion display by the character 57AKA is performed after the first pseudo continuous variation is started. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed in a change suggesting manner in the character display area AKB1. Based on the change suggestion display of the production execution example 57AKG10, a specific motion production is executed in which the display of the character 57AKA is caused to perform a specific motion at the second position. In production execution example 57AKG10, until after the re-variable display that is the first pseudo continuous variation is started, a continuation suggestion display is performed in the advance notice suggestion display, and then it can be changed to a change suggestion display. In this way, by preventing the display position of the character image from changing at the same time with the start of the re-variable display that becomes the pseudo continuous variation, the pseudo continuous variation in the pseudo continuous performance and the display position of the character image are changed. It becomes easier for players to individually recognize the position change performance, and it is possible to prevent each performance effect from deteriorating. In addition, after the continuation suggestion display is performed in the preview suggestion performance, the variable display is temporarily stopped before the start of the first pseudo continuous variation, and then the first pseudo continuous variation is started. The suggestion display can give an impression of suggesting a pseudo-coupling variation in a pseudo-coupling performance.

In the production execution example 57AKG11 shown in FIG. 11-17(C), after the change suggestion display of the production execution example 57AKG10 is performed, the display position of the character 57AKA is changed to the character display area AKB2, and the display position of the character 57AKA is changed to the character display area AKB1. A performance image showing the police car 57AKC is displayed, and a performance image showing the dotted line 57AKD is displayed between the police car 57AKC and the character 57AKA, so that the preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKA is continuously executed. Furthermore, the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKA is extended and executed. In production execution example 57AKG11, the movement state display in which character 57AKA is displayed in a normal running mode in character display area AKB1 is such that after a continuation suggestion display such as production execution example 57AKG08 is performed, a change suggestion display by character 57AKA is performed. After this, the character 57AKA is displayed in the same normal running mode as before the continuation suggestion display. In addition, before the approach notification display including the utterance notification display of production execution examples 57AKG04 to 57AKG06 or the arrival notification display of production execution example 57AKG07 is performed, following the continuation suggestion display such as production execution example 57AKG08, the change of production execution example 57AKG10 is performed. After the suggestion display is performed, or without the continuous suggestion display as in production execution example 57AKG08 or the change suggestion display in production execution example 57AKG10, the display position of the character 57AKA is changed as in production execution example 57AKG11. There may be cases. Furthermore, the rate at which the continuation suggestion display such as the performance execution example 57AKG08 is executed may be varied depending on the display mode of the speech notification display in the performance execution examples 57AKG04 to 57AKG06.

In the effect execution examples 57AKG12 to 57AKG14 shown in FIGS. 11-17(D) to (F), an approach notification display by the character 57AKA is performed during a specific period after the movement state display of the effect execution example 57AKG11 is performed. . In these cases, the effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed in a full-power running mode in the character display area AKB2. In addition, as a speech notification display by the character 57AKA corresponding to the distance from the police car 57AKC to the character 57AKA, in production execution example 57AKG12, a first stage speech notification display corresponding to distance L11 is performed, and in production execution example 57AKG13, at distance L12. A corresponding second stage speech notification display is performed, and in performance execution example 57AKG14, a third stage speech notification display corresponding to the distance L13 is performed.

The production execution example 57AKG15 shown in FIG. 11-17(G) is the timing of a ready-to-win state in which the variable display of decorative symbols becomes a ready-to-win mode after the production execution example 57AKG14, and at this time, the arrival notification display is performed. The display mode of the character 57AKA and the police car 57AKC in the approach notification display of the performance execution examples 57AKG12 to 57AKG14 can be changed depending on the arrival notification display. In the performance execution example 57AKG16 shown in FIG. 11-17(H), notification of the reach completion is performed after the timing of the reach completion, and at this time, the character 57AKA is displaying the suggested target. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKA is displayed in a specific manner in the character display area AKB2. Based on the suggestion target display of the production execution example 57AKG16, a suggestion motion production is executed in which the display of the character 57AKA is caused to make a suggestion motion in the third position. In addition, in production execution example 57AKG16, by displaying a production image that notifies the message "Reach!", it is possible to notify that the reach has been achieved, and to provide a timing at which a notice can be executed after the reach has been achieved. In addition, in this performance execution example, after the pseudo-continuation variation is executed once in the pseudo-continuation performance, the reach is established. Therefore, the character display area AKB2 is a display position of a character image set to suggest that a notice will be executed after a reach is achieved as a preview effect. Following such suggestion target display, in the effect execution example 57AKG17 shown in FIG. 11-17(I), a group display preview is executed as a preview after the reach is established. In this way, after the suggestion target is displayed in the preview suggestion performance, a notice after the reach is established, such as a group display notice, is executed. can be suggested.

In the production execution examples shown in Figures 11-18 and 11-19, in the case of a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuation variation in the pseudo-continuation production is performed twice, the reach mode changes and the reach production of super reach is executed. The performance is determined to be a battle command performance, the character to be used is determined to be the character 57AKB, and it is determined that the continuation suggestion display is to be executed corresponding to the first pseudo-coupled variation and the second pseudo-coupled variation.

In the performance execution example 57AKH01 shown in FIG. 11-18(A), when the variable display of decorative symbols is finished, a preparation notification display is performed by the character 57AKB. When the preparation notification display is performed, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed in the preparation notification mode in the character display area AKB0. By the preparation notification display of the production execution example 57AKH01, a preparation motion production is executed in which the display of the character 57AKB is caused to make a preparation motion in the first position. In the production execution example 57AKH02 shown in FIG. 11-18(B), a change suggestion display by the character 57AKB is performed when variable display of decorative symbols is started. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed in a change suggestion mode in the character display area AKB0. According to the change suggestion display of the production execution example 57AKH02, a specific action production is executed in which the character 57AKB is displayed in a specific motion at the first position.

In the performance execution example 57AKH03 shown in FIG. 11-18(C), the advance notice suggestion performance using the character 57AKB is started after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. After the change suggestion display of production execution example 57AKH02 is performed, the display position of character 57AKB is changed to character display area AKB1, and a production image showing police car 57AKC is displayed in character display area AKB0, and character 57AKB is changed from police car 57AKC to character display area AKB1. In the meantime, a presentation image showing the dotted line 57AKD is displayed, thereby starting the preview suggestion presentation using the character 57AKB. In the production execution example 57AKH03, the distance from the police car 57AKC to the character 57AKB is longer than the distance L11 shown in FIG. 11-9(A), so the character 57AKB is displayed in the normal driving mode in the character display area AKB1. The moving status is displayed. Based on the movement state display of the performance execution example 57AKH03, a movement performance is executed in which the display of the character 57AKB is operated in a predetermined manner at the second position, and the display position of the police car 57AKC is moved toward the display position of the character 57AKB.

In the performance execution example 57AKH04 shown in FIG. 11-18(D), an approach notification display by the character 57AKB is performed during a specific period after the movement state display of the performance execution example 57AKH03 is performed. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed in the character display area AKB1 in a full-power running mode. In addition, the first stage speech notification display by the character 57AKB is performed corresponding to the distance L11 from the police car 57AKC to the character 57AKB. In the performance execution example 57AKH05 shown in FIG. 11-18(E), a second stage speech notification display by the character 57AKB is performed following the performance execution example 57AKH04. Also in this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed in the character display area AKB1 in a full-power running mode. The second stage speech notification display by the character 57AKB is performed corresponding to the distance L12 from the police car 57AKC to the character 57AKB. In the performance execution example 57AKH06 shown in FIG. 11-16(F), the third stage speech notification display by the character 57AKB is performed after the performance execution example 57AKH05. Also in this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed in the character display area AKB1 in a full-power running mode. The third stage speech notification display by the character 57AKB is performed corresponding to the distance L13 from the police car 57AKC to the character 57AKB. By the approach notification display and the speech notification display of the performance execution examples 57AKH04 to 57AKH06, a notification action performance is executed in which the character 57AKB is displayed at the second position.

In the effect execution example 57AKH07 shown in FIG. 11-18(G), the arrival notification display is performed after the effect execution example 57AKH06. The display mode of the character 57AKB and the police car 57AKC in the approach notification display of the performance execution examples 57AKH04 to 57AKH06 can be changed depending on the arrival notification display. In the production execution example 57AKH08 shown in FIG. 11-18(H), a continuation suggestion display by the character 57AKB is performed at timing 57AKT01. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed in a special manner in the character display area AKB1. By the continuation suggestion display of the production execution example 57AKH08, a special motion production is executed in which the character 57AKB is displayed in a special motion at the second position.

In the effect execution example 57AKH09 shown in FIG. 11-19(A), the variable display is temporarily stopped before the start of the first pseudo continuous variation, following the effect execution example 57AKH08. In production execution example 57AKH09, the decorative pattern serving as the pseudo continuous pattern is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, thereby ending the first variation and making it possible to start the first pseudo continuous variation. In the performance execution example 57AKH10 shown in FIG. 11-19(B), a change suggestion display by the character 57AKB is performed after the first pseudo continuous variation is started. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed in a change suggesting mode in the character display area AKB1. By displaying the change suggestion in the production execution example 57AKH10, a specific motion production is executed in which the display of the character 57AKB is caused to perform a specific motion at the second position. In production execution example 57AKH10, until after the re-variable display that is the first pseudo continuous variation is started, a continuation suggestion display is performed in the advance notice suggestion display, and then it can be changed to a change suggestion display.

In the production execution example 57AKH11 shown in FIG. 11-19(C), after the change suggestion display of the production execution example 57AKH10 is performed, the display position of the character 57AKB is changed to the character display area AKB2, and the display position of the character 57AKB is changed to the character display area AKB1. A performance image showing the police car 57AKC is displayed, and a performance image showing the dotted line 57AKD is displayed between the police car 57AKC and the character 57AKB, so that the preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKB is continuously executed. In addition, the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKB is extended and executed. In the performance execution example 57AKH11, the movement state display in which the character 57AKB is displayed in the normal running mode in the character display area AKB1 is such that the change suggestion display by the character 57AKB is performed after the continuation suggestion display such as in the performance execution example 57AKH08 is performed. After this, the character 57AKB is displayed in the same normal running mode as before the continuation suggestion display is performed. As a result, a common action effect is executed in which the display of the character 57AKB is caused to perform a specific action based on the change suggestion display, and then the character 57AKB is caused to perform a predetermined action common to that before the special action is performed.

In the performance execution example 57AKGH12 shown in FIG. 11-19(D), after the approach notification display and the utterance notification display are performed similarly to the performance execution examples 57AKH04 to 57AKH06, the arrival notification display is performed similarly to the performance execution example 57AKH07. After that, at timing 57AKT02, a continuation suggestion display is performed by the character 57AKB, and the variable display is temporarily stopped before the start of the second pseudo continuous variation. In production execution example 57AKH12, the decorative pattern that becomes the pseudo continuous pattern is stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C, thereby ending the first pseudo continuous variation and making it possible to start the second pseudo continuous variation. . In the production execution example 57AKH13 shown in FIG. 11-19(E), a change suggestion display by the character 57AKB is performed after the second pseudo continuous variation is started. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed in a change suggestion mode in the character display area AKB2. In the production execution example 57AKH12, the continuous suggestion display is performed in the preview suggestion production until after the re-variable display that is the second pseudo continuous variation is started, and then it can be changed to the change suggestion display.

In the effect execution example 57AKH14 shown in FIG. 11-19(F), after the change suggestion display of the effect execution example 57AKH13 is performed, the display position of the character 57AKB is changed to the character display area AKB5, and the display position of the character 57AKB is changed to the character display area AKB2. A performance image showing the police car 57AKC is displayed, and a performance image showing the dotted line 57AKD is displayed between the police car 57AKC and the character 57AKB, so that the preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKB is continuously executed. In addition, the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKB is extended and executed. In the performance execution example 57AKH14, the movement state display in which the character 57AKB is displayed in the normal running mode in the character display area AKB5 is such that the change suggestion display by the character 57AKB is performed after the continuation suggestion display of the performance execution example 57AKH12 is performed. After that, the character 57AKB is displayed in the same normal running mode as before the continuation suggestion display is performed. As a result, a common action effect is executed in which the display of the character 57AKB is caused to perform a specific action based on the change suggestion display, and then the character 57AKB is caused to perform a predetermined action common to that before the special action is performed.

In the production execution example 57AKH15 shown in FIG. 11-19(G), the suggested target is displayed by the character 57AKB at timing 57AKT05 after the arrival notification display is performed after the approach notification display and the utterance notification display are performed. is being carried out. In this case, the effect image showing the character 57AKB is displayed in a specific manner in the character display area AKB5. Based on the suggestion target display of the production execution example 57AKH15, a suggestion motion production is executed in which the display of the character 57AKB is caused to make a suggestion motion in the third position. Following such a suggestion target display, a battle command performance is executed in the performance execution example 57AKH16 shown in FIG. 11-19(H). In performance execution example 57AKH16, a battle command is notified by displaying a performance image in a battle command performance. At this time, when the display color in the battle command performance is "gold", the jackpot reliability is higher than when the display color in the battle command performance is "red" or "blue", and the control is controlled to a jackpot game state. This increases the player's expectations for what will happen.

In the performance execution examples shown in FIGS. 11-18 and 11-19, the continuation suggestion display is executed corresponding to the first pseudo continuous variation and the second pseudo continuous variation. On the other hand, for example, in step 57AKS40 of the advance notice suggestion setting process shown in FIG. 11-14, in the decision example 57AKE24 shown in FIG. There are cases. In this case, after a change suggestion display like the example 57AKH02 of effect execution shown in FIG. 11-18(B) is performed, the position change effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 11-19(F). The display position of the character 57AKB is changed to a character display area 57AKB5 such as the performance execution example 57AKH14, and execution of the preview suggestion performance using the character 57AKB is started. In this way, in the preview suggestion performance, the display position of the character image, presence or absence of the continuation suggestion display, the number of times the continuation suggestion display is executed, and various other performance aspects are changed depending on the performance during the variable display, including the variable pattern and the preview performance. Depending on the situation, different settings are possible.

(Modified examples of characteristic parts 57AK and 58AK)
Regarding the advance notice suggestion performance, the execution timing, performance mode being executed, and jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Regarding the preview performance to be suggested by the preview suggestion performance, the execution timing, performance mode being executed, and jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1, etc.

The preview suggestion performance is not limited to displaying a performance image showing the characters 57AKA and 57AKB, but may also display a performance image showing a character different from the characters 57AKA and 57AKB, or displaying more characters. There may be cases in which an effect image showing the image is displayed. The preview suggestion effect is not limited to displaying a production image showing a police car 57AKC and a dotted line 57AKD imitating footprints, but may also display a production image showing arbitrary display contents different from the police car 57AKC and the dotted line 57AKD. It may be something. The display mode of various displays in the preview suggestion performance can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The plurality of character display areas are not limited to those that are preset as shown in FIG. , may be specified by a display position determination calculation. The timing at which the performance during variable display is executed can be specified from the performance control process timer judgment value, display control data, etc. included in the performance control pattern. Using the timing specified in this way and the speed at which the display position of the police car 57AKC moves during the movement performance, when starting the preview suggestion performance, the distance from the display position of the police car 57AKC to the display position of the characters 57AKA and 57AKB is calculated. All you have to do is decide. In this case, any display position on the screen of the image display device 5 may be set as the display position at which the preview suggestion effect will start, as long as it is a display position that can be started while securing the determined distance. I can do it.

The continuation suggestion display is not limited to the decision example 57AKE24 shown in FIG. 11-15(D), and may be used as long as it is possible to decide to execute the continuation suggestion display at any timing. For example, the continuation suggestion display may be determined at a predetermined rate at a timing corresponding to a notice after the reach is established or a reach development effect. When the continuation suggestion display is determined to be at a timing corresponding to the notice after the reach is established, the operation section performance at the time of the reach is sometimes executed after the continuation suggestion display is performed. After it is determined in step 57AKS12 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-12 to execute the operation section effect when a reach is established, in step 57AKS40 of the advance notice suggestion setting process, a continuation suggestion display is announced after the reach is established. If it is decided to carry out at a timing corresponding to, for example, timing 57AKT03, the continuation suggestion display is performed at a timing corresponding to a notice after a reach is established, and an operation part effect when a reach is established is executed. You can also do it. Alternatively, if the continuation suggestion display is determined at a timing corresponding to the reach development performance, the operation section performance at the time of the reach development may be executed after the continuation suggestion display is performed. After it is determined in step 57AKS12 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-12 to execute the operation part effect at the time of reach development, in step 57AKS40 of the advance notice suggestion setting process, the continuation suggestion display is changed to the reach development effect. If it is decided to perform at the corresponding timing, the operation part effect at the time of reach development can be executed in accordance with the continuation suggestion display being performed at the timing corresponding to the reach development effect, such as timing 57AKT04, for example. .

For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. The time saving symbol may be a part of the missed symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol. When performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or lottery symbols for jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers such as random numbers, lottery random numbers for small winning symbols, random numbers for jackpot lottery determination, lottery random numbers for falling lottery, etc. The time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may also be used in conjunction with combinations of symbols displayed as other symbols, such as small winning symbols or losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, there will be no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

When drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol will not change depending on the setting value.In other words, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol will be the same for all setting values. However, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a dedicated random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the starting prize opening). Regarding winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and small winning symbol random numbers are used for time-saving symbol drawings. When used, a specific small winning symbol random number can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used for a time saving symbol lottery, the random number for a fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol. When drawing a time-saving symbol using a structure, when the small winning symbol uses the time-saving symbol in combination, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. .

Regarding winning when drawing a time-saving symbol, if a random number of missing symbols is used in the drawing of a time-saving symbol, the winning value will be a specific random number of missing symbols, and if a jackpot random number is used in the drawing of a time-saving symbol, a specific jackpot will be determined. A symbol random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random values are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the setting, so this is only possible if the setting values cannot be changed.

The determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, even if the time-saving number is reset or the lottery is not selected, it is only necessary to decide for each gaming machine.

Regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, there can be a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol. When the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2. Even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving symbols awarded may vary depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

The lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state. A lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle. The number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot. When the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

In the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state). In the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability low-base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called specified number of fixed variable display machines (ST machine)), the machine is in a high-probability low-base state when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state has been variable displayed a predetermined number of times and has ended, the time saving state may be controlled. When a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. The symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to be different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

When such a time-saving symbol can be displayed, it may be possible to execute the advance notice suggestion performance in the above embodiment as a performance suggesting that the time-saving symbol will be displayed. In this case, the execution rate of the preview suggestion performance may be varied depending on whether or not the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed. For example, a "time-saving symbol" is provided that specifies that the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a winning determination result. When pre-determining the preview suggestion display in step 57AKS03 of the pre-read notice setting process shown in FIG. The preview suggestion display is executed at a higher rate than when the winning result is ``Reach Confirmed'' and lower than when the winning judgment result is ``Jackpot'' (for example, at a ratio of 60/100). It would be good if it could be determined that there is a suggestion. In the advance notice suggestion setting process shown in FIG. 11-14, when the last-minute determination of the advance notice suggestion display is made in step 57AKS34, whether the variable display content is a "time-saving symbol" corresponding to the stop display of the time-saving symbol or "a time-saving symbol" is determined. It is only necessary to be able to determine that there is a suggestion, in which advance notice suggestion display is executed at different rates depending on whether the situation is other than ``.''. For example, when the variable display content is "time saving symbol", the percentage is higher than when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", and "super reach (loss)". It suffices if the variable display content is determined to be "with suggestion" at a lower rate (for example, at a ratio of 70/100) than when the variable display content is "jackpot". When determining the suggestion target performance in step 57AKS38 of the advance notice suggestion setting process, the variable display result is displayed at different rates depending on whether the variable display result is a "time-saving symbol" corresponding to the stop display of the time-saving symbol or a symbol other than the "time-saving symbol". A suggestion target performance may be determined. For example, when the variable display result is "Time-saving symbol", the determination ratio of "Pseudo connection (temporary stop)" is 10/100, the determination ratio of "Notice after reach establishment" is 10/100, The determination ratios of "reach development performance", "battle command performance", "win/fail branch performance", and "win/fail inciting operation section performance" may all be set to 20/100. As a result, when determining the character to be used in step 57AKS39 of the advance notice suggestion setting process, the character to be used is determined at a different rate depending on whether the variable display result is a "time-saving symbol" or something other than "time-saving symbol". It's okay. For example, when the variable display result is a "time saving symbol", the character 57AKA is more likely to be determined as the character to be used than when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and the preview suggestion effect by the character 57AKA is more likely to be executed. Good too. When the variable display result is a "jackpot", the character 57AKB or double display is more likely to be determined than when the variable display result is a "time-saving symbol", and the preview suggestion effect using the character 57AKB or double display is more likely to be executed. It's okay to be. When determining the continuation suggestion display in step 57AKS40 of the notice suggestion setting process, the presence or absence of the continuation suggestion display and the execution timing are determined at different rates depending on whether the variable display result is a "time-saving symbol" or something other than "time-saving symbol". may be determined. In addition, the presence or absence of a preview suggestion effect, the effect mode, the execution timing, the display mode including the display position of the effect image, the operation mode including the sound output mode, the light emitting mode, the vibration mode, or a combination of some or all of these. The rate at which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed may be varied depending on the time saving symbols. Thereby, it is possible to improve the game's interest by varying the expectation that the time-saving symbols will be stopped and displayed depending on the presence or absence of the preview suggestion performance and the performance mode.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 57AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and includes a display means and a performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of performances including performances displayed on the display means, the performance execution means comprising: A plurality of types of preview performances, a specific change performance that changes the display mode of a suggestion display suggesting one of the preview performances to a specific mode in response to the execution of the preview performance, and a suggestion display before the execution of the preview performance. a movement effect of displaying a predetermined display related to the first position at the first position, displaying the suggestion display at either the second position or the third position, and then moving the predetermined display toward the suggestion display; It is possible to perform a position change effect of changing the suggestion display to the third position, and the distance from the first position to the third position is longer than the distance from the first position to the second position, The execution timing of the preview performance can be suggested based on the distance between the predetermined display and the suggestion display in the movement performance, and after the movement performance has started, the position change performance is not executed and a specific change is made to the suggestion display at the second position. It is controlled in a more advantageous state when the position change performance is executed after the movement performance has started and the specific change performance is executed for the third position suggestion display, rather than when the performance is executed. The percentage is high. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display. The plurality of types of preview effects may be, for example, a pseudo-continuation change, a notice after a reach is established, a reach development effect, a battle command effect, a win/fail branch effect, an operation part effect, and the like. The suggestion display may be, for example, the display of characters 57AKA and 57AKB. The specific mode may be, for example, a display mode of suggestion target display. The specific change effect may be, for example, a display effect based on effect display examples 57AK116 and 57AK216. The predetermined display may be, for example, a display of police car 57AKC. The first position may be, for example, the character display area AKB0. The second position may be, for example, the character display area AKB1. The third position may be, for example, character display areas AKB2 to AKB7. The movement effect may be, for example, a display effect using effect display examples 57AK103, 57AK104, 57AK203, and 57AK204. The position change effect may be, for example, the display effect in the effect execution examples 57AKG09 to 57AKG11 and 57AKH09 to 57AKH11. What is possible to suggest the execution timing of the preview performance may be, for example, the relationship between the character display areas AKB0 to AKB7 and the suggested content as shown in FIG. 11-5(B). The high ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, the execution ratio of the continuation suggestion performance that increases when the variable display result is a jackpot in decision example 57AKE24.
According to such a configuration, the rate at which the position change performance is controlled to be advantageous varies depending on whether or not the position change performance is executed, thereby diversifying the suggestions of the preview performance to attract attention and improving the enjoyment of the game. I can do it.

It may be possible to display a predetermined mode of suggestion display at the first position before displaying the predetermined display at the first position. Here, the predetermined mode may be, for example, a display mode of a preparation notification display.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the suggestion of the preview performance by the predetermined display and the suggestion display, and to improve the interest in the game.

A distance identification display may be displayed between the predetermined display and the suggestion display, and the display mode of the distance identification display may be changeable in accordance with movement of the predetermined display in the movement effect. Here, the distance identification display may be, for example, a display of a dotted line 57AKD. The display mode of the distance identification display may be, for example, the length of the dotted line 57AKD.
In such a configuration, the distance identification display makes it easier to recognize the suggestion of the preview performance, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

It may be possible to display a suggestion display of an operation mode while the movement effect is being executed. Here, the operation mode may be, for example, a normal running mode in which the moving state is displayed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the suggestion display during execution of the moving performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

It may be possible to execute a special change effect that changes the display mode of the suggestion display to a special mode that suggests execution of a position change effect. Here, the special mode may be, for example, a display mode of a continuation suggestion display. The special change effect may be, for example, a display effect using effect display examples 57AK114 and 57AK214.
In such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the impression of the position change effect and improve the interest in the game.

The special distance presentation may be executed when the distance between the predetermined display and the suggestion display in the moving presentation reaches a predetermined distance, and the display mode of the suggestion display may be changeable after the special distance presentation is executed. . Here, the predetermined distance may be, for example, the distance L11. The special distance effect may be, for example, a display effect using effect display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113 and 57AK211 to 57AK213.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the predetermined display and the suggestion display, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

When executing the position change effect, it may be possible to display a special mode suggestion display. Here, the special mode may be, for example, a display mode of a change suggestion display.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the suggestion display and improve the interest in the game.

The position change effect can be executed by moving the suggestion display, and the speed of movement may be different between the predetermined display in the moving display and the suggestion display in the position change effect.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game through various displays.

An operation means that can be operated by a player, a vibration performance execution means that can perform a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and a light emission performance that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration performance. A light emitting performance execution means that can be executed and a specific performance execution means that can execute a specific performance according to the progress of the game are provided, so that when the predetermined vibration performance is executed, it is better to perform the predetermined vibration performance than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed. However, the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is high, and the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed. The execution means is capable of executing a special vibration performance in conjunction with execution of the specific performance, and the vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. Here, the operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. Bye. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific performance may be, for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration performance is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section performance pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed depends on, for example, the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be anything such as jackpot reliability. The fact that the special vibration performance can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration performance during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

It may be possible to execute a predetermined vibration effect in conjunction with a special change effect that changes the display mode of the suggestion display to a special mode that suggests execution of a position change effect. Here, the fact that a predetermined vibration effect can be executed in conjunction with a special change effect means that, for example, when a continuation suggestion display is executed at timing 57AKT03 corresponding to a notice after a reach is established or at timing 57AKT04 corresponding to a reach development effect, a reach is achieved. It may be sufficient to perform the operation section effect at the timing AKT12 or the timing AKT13 when the reach develops.
In such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the impression of the change in the suggestion display and improve the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 58AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and includes a display means and a performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of performances including performances displayed on the display means, the performance execution means comprising: A plurality of types of preview performances, a suggestive action performance in which a character image suggesting one of the preview performances is displayed in a suggestive manner in response to the execution of the preview performance, and a period until the suggestive action performance is executed, It is possible to perform a special action effect in which the character image is displayed in a predetermined manner, and then a special action different from the suggested action is performed; Suggestive action performance can be executed, and it is more advantageous when the special action performance is performed and then the suggested action performance is performed than when the suggested action performance is performed without the special action performance being performed. There is a high rate of control. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display. The plurality of types of preview effects may be, for example, a pseudo-continuation change, a notice after a reach is established, a reach development effect, a battle command effect, a win/fail branch effect, an operation part effect, and the like. The display of the character images may be, for example, display of effect images showing the characters 57AKA and 57AKB. The suggested action may be, for example, an action in displaying the suggested object. The suggested motion performance may be, for example, a display performance using performance display examples 57AK116 and 57AK216. The predetermined action may be, for example, an action in displaying the moving state. The special operation may be, for example, an operation in displaying a continuation suggestion. The special action effect may be, for example, a display effect using effect display examples 57AK115 and 57AK215. The fact that the suggested motion performance can be executed after the special motion performance is executed may be, for example, execution of the display performance in the performance execution examples 57AKG08 to 57AKG11 and 57AKH08 to 57AKH11. The high ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, the execution ratio of the continuation suggestion performance that increases when the variable display result is a jackpot in decision example 57AKE24.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the suggestions of the preview performance to attract attention and improve the interest in the game.

During a specific period after the character image is displayed in a predetermined operation, it may be possible to execute a notification operation effect in which the character image is displayed in a notification operation different from the predetermined operation. Here, the notification operation may be, for example, an operation in an approach notification display. The notification operation performance may be, for example, a display performance using performance display examples 57AK111 to 57AK113 and 57AK211 to 57AK213.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the display of the character image and improve the interest in the game.

After the special action effect is executed, it may be possible to perform a common action effect in which the display of the character image is caused to perform a specific movement, and then the character image is caused to perform a predetermined movement that is the same as before the special movement is performed. Here, the specific action may be, for example, an action in displaying a change suggestion. The common action performance may be, for example, the display performance in the performance execution examples 57AKG11 and 57AKH11.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the display of character images and improve the interest in the game.

Before execution of the preview performance, display a predetermined image related to the display of the character image in a first position, display the character image in a second position, and then move the display of the predetermined image toward the display of the character image. It is possible to perform a moving movement effect, and the display of the character image may be caused to perform a predetermined movement in conjunction with the moving movement effect. Here, the predetermined image may be, for example, an effect image showing the police car 57AKC. The first position may be, for example, the character display area AKB0. The second position may be, for example, character display areas AKB1 to AKB7. The moving action may be, for example, an action display in a moving display. The moving motion effect may be, for example, a display effect using effect display examples 57AK103, 57AK104, 57AK203, and 57AK204.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the display of the character image and the display of the predetermined image, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Before executing the preview performance, the character image can be displayed at either the second position or the third position, and a position change performance can be executed to change the display of the character image at the second position to the third position. , it may be possible to execute a special motion effect before executing the position change effect. Here, the second position may be, for example, the character display area AKB1. The third position may be, for example, character display areas AKB2 to AKB7. The position change effect may be, for example, the display effect in the effect execution examples 57AKG09 to 57AKG11 and 57AKH09 to 57AKH11.
In such a configuration, the impression of the position change performance can be increased by the special motion performance, and the game interest can be improved.

It may be possible to perform a preparatory motion effect for displaying the character image at the first position. Here, the preparation action may be, for example, an action display in a preparation suggestion display. The preparatory motion effect may be, for example, a display effect using the effect display examples 57AK102 and AK202.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the suggestion of a preview performance by displaying the character image, and to improve the interest in the game.

An operation means that can be operated by a player, a vibration performance execution means that can perform a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and a light emission performance that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration performance. A light emitting performance execution means that can be executed and a specific performance execution means that can execute a specific performance according to the progress of the game are provided, so that when the predetermined vibration performance is executed, it is better to perform the predetermined vibration performance than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed. However, the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is high, and the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed. The execution means is capable of executing a special vibration performance in conjunction with execution of the specific performance, and the vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. Here, the operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. Bye. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific performance may be, for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration performance is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section performance pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed depends on, for example, the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be anything such as jackpot reliability. The fact that the special vibration performance can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration performance during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

It may be possible to perform a predetermined vibration performance along with the special motion performance. Here, the fact that a predetermined vibration effect can be executed in conjunction with a special change effect means that, for example, when a continuation suggestion display is executed at timing 57AKT03 corresponding to a notice after a reach is established or at timing 57AKT04 corresponding to a reach development effect, a reach is achieved. It may be sufficient to perform the operation section effect at the timing AKT12 or the timing AKT13 when the reach develops.
In such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the impression of the change in the suggestion display and improve the interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 57AK and 58AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic parts 57AK and 58AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual feature parts that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other feature parts, as appropriate.

1... Pachinko gaming machine 5... Image display device 9... Game effect lamp 9B1... Lever lamp 9B2... Button lamp 9C... Upper frame lamp 9M... Left frame lamp 9N... Right frame lamp 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 31A... Stick Controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Microcomputer for game control 120...CPU for performance control
131... Vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as the vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates;
a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect;
A reach effect execution means capable of executing a reach effect indicating that the control is in the advantageous state;
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance after the reach performance is started,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
The vibration performance execution means includes:
The predetermined vibration effect is performed at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display at which the reach effect is executed, and a second timing before the start of the variable display at which the reach effect is executed. is executable,
The special vibration performance can be performed during a specific performance period that is an execution period of the specific performance,
As the special vibration performance, it is possible to execute a first special vibration performance that corresponds to the operation of a movable body for performance different from the operation means during the specific performance period,
As the special vibration performance, a second special vibration performance corresponding to image display can be executed during the specific performance period,
The vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the first special vibration performance or the second special vibration performance,
The first special vibration performance and the second special vibration performance have different vibration modes,
The light emitting effect execution means is
The light emitting effect can be performed in different light emission modes when the predetermined vibration effect is being executed and when the first special vibration effect or the second special vibration effect is being executed,
The light emission effect can be performed in different light emission modes when the first special vibration effect is being executed and when the second special vibration effect is being executed,
The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing both the first special vibration effect and the second special vibration effect in one variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images